Home

Sony Water Dispenser 2 User's Manual

1. Device control block in VTR disk recorder operation mode trackball type Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders Selecting a VTR disk recorder To select the VTR disk recorder to be controlled in the device selection buttons of the device control block press a selection of the DEV 1 to DEV 12 buttons turning them on Controlling the tape disk transport Using the buttons in the device control block you can control the VTR tape transport or the disk recorder disk transport For more details of the effect of buttons in VTR disk recorder operation mode see Device Control Block Trackball and Device Control Block Joystick in Chapter 2 Volume 1 Depending on the settings in setup you can also operate the VTR or disk recorder from the standard type transition control block For more details of the effect of buttons in VTR disk recorder operation mode see the section Transition Control Block Standard Type in Chapter 2 Volume 1 For details of settings in setup see Setting program button assignment page 211 Checking VTR Disk Recorder Information You can check the VTR disk recorder information timecode information and VTR disk recorder operating status set in the device control block in the Device menu display To check the VTR
2. FF button RUN button REVVIND button Keyframe control block Executing Effects Executing an effect automatically Use the follovving procedure 1 Select the region in which you want to execute the effect using the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block See step 2 page 116 of Recalling a register 2 With the numeric keypad enter the number of the register in which the effect you want to execute is saved and press the ENTER button to confirm This recalls the effect saved in the register 3 In the keyframe control block press the RUN button The RUN button lights amber and the effect is executed automatically Moving to the first keyframe of the effect To move to the first keyframe of the effect press the REWIND button Moving to the last keyframe of the effect To move to the last keyframe of the effect press the FF button Run Mode Setting You can set the run mode in which an effect is executed when you press the RUN button Specifying the effect execution direction To specify the effect execution direction press the NORM button or the REV button turning it on When you press one turning it on the other automatically goes off To execute the effect so as to obtain the effects of the NORM and REV buttons alternately press the NORM REV button turning it on When the NORM button is lit Th
3. 74 Invert px 22525F 50000000 0000000 0 74 Key Density 75 Key Source 75 Interpolation ASA 76 Global Effect Operations 78 Combiner Settings sse syre e oa ESES 78 Table of Contents 3 Biek Settings ees esa ai D ee 81 Shadow Settings E E EEES TRE RS 84 Chapter 12 External Devices Control of External DeviCeS eseseseeeessesseseseecececosescseseseecececosososeseseeeeeeeesesee 86 Control of P BUS Devices Creating and Editing the P BUS 2522 87 P BUS Tri SES neee a a eea a duke teostgseestes E 90 Control of GPI Devices sscssessererssrsssessssersssesssssrsssnssssnsessssesssesessesenees 91 GPI Timeline Creation 4 91 Control of VTRs and Disk 94 Controlling the Tape Disk Transport 94 Checking VTR Disk Recorder Information 2222 95 C eup 6c Plays ee 96 VTR Disk Recorder 101 Disk Recorder File 5 106 Chapter 13 Keyfram
4. 306 Renaming a Directory sterse siirinsesi deen i ia 306 Deleting a Directory esercenti ee iaoe e Er se 307 VVrite Protecting a Directory 307 Table of Contents 7 8 Chapter 18 Macros Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 310 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 311 Creating and Editing a Macro 312 Saving a Macio iiaia r E neni in Gait 314 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 316 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 317 Creating and Saving a 5 318 Macro Attachment Assigning sesesseseesosoesessesossesoesesooseososoosoesessesossesosses 322 Setting and Canceling a Macro 2222 322 Executing a Macro by Macro 2222 325 Chapter 19 DIAGNOSIS Appendix Wipe Pattern 330 Standard Wipes snenie 330 Bia sv 331 Rotary 332 EES 333 Random Diamond Dust 5 335 DME Wipe Pattern 56 336 DME
5. 235 Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu 235 Signal Input Settings Input 2222 239 Signal Output Settings Output 5 2222 240 Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu 244 Settings Relating to Keys VVipes and Frame Memory sey Wipes MeM ci a ene 246 Settings Relating to Function Links Link Menu 249 Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu 253 Setup Relating to 260 Settings Relating to Signal Inputs Menu 260 Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu 261 Setup Relating to 2222 265 Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs Input Config Menu 265 GPI Input Setting GPI Input Assign Menu 266 Parallel Output Settings Output Config Menu 269 GPI Output Setting GPI Output Assign 270 Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign Menu 273 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 278 Router Interface Settings Router Menu 5222 2226 278 Tally Group Settings Group Tally 2222 280 Wiring Settings Wiring
6. 91 Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 94 Controlling the Tape Disk 5222 94 Checking VTR Disk Recorder Information 95 R 96 VMER DiSk Recorder aa 0 101 Disk Recorder File se seeeecce seen see 106 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 1084 86 Control of External Devices Use the Device menu to carry out operations for controlling external devices such as the following e Devices supporting P BUS Peripheral II protocol referred to as P BUS devices in the manual e Devices supporting GPI General Purpose Interface referred to as GPI devices in the manual e VTRs e Disk recorders supporting Sony disk 9 pin protocol For VTRs and disk recorders you can also carry out operations using the device control block To operate P BUS devices VTRs and disk recorders in the DVS 9000 system the following settings are required on the DCU 9 pin serial port Device type setting Device name Setting of control panel SCU to be used For details of the settings see Making serial port settings page 273 When using a disk recorder be sure to go to the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu and recall the file For details of the operation see Recalling a file page 107 Accessing the Device menu In the menu con
7. Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List L Select the first copy source file 1 to 99 2 List R Select the first destination file 1 to 99 3 Num Number to be selected 1 to 99 e To select a single file press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor or press directly on the list in the status area Press Copy This copies the selected file or files to the specified destination If there is already data in the specified location a confirmation message appears e Select Yes to overwrite the data e Select No to cancel copying all of the files Operations on Individual Files 299 s li 21 1060 s lli 4a deyo Renaming Files You can rename a file on the hard disk or memory card As an example to rename a snapshot file use the following procedure 1 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot The Snapshot menu appears The status area shows the device status and a list of files present on the device Press File Edit A detailed list appears Here too you can select a device or specify a directory See page 296 Using any of the following methods select the file you want to rename e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List File selection 1 to 99
8. Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Decay Dust 1 Amount of the afterimage 0 00 to 100 00 disappearing as stardust a 2 Dust Soft Timing with which stardust 0 00 to 100 00 disappears Dust Size Size of stardust 0 00 to 100 00 4 Dust Aspect Aspect ratio of stardust 100 00 to 100 00 a The way in which the afterimage disappears is affected by both the Video Decay and Decay Dust parameter adjustments for the motion decay Keyframe Strobe Settings Each time a keyframe is passed the video image is frozen and left remaining DME Special Effect Operations 71 suones do IWA 11 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 VVhen you turn on keyframe strobe if the trail or motion decay effect is on it automatically goes off Leaving a trail of afterimages of the image Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF5 Light Trail and HF4 KF Strobe The KF Strobe menu appears 2 Press KF Strobe turning it on This enables the keyframe strobe effect and you can now use the knobs to adjust the parameters 3 Set the following parameter Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Decay Degree of blurring of the video 0 00 to 100 00 3 signal a At the setting 0 00 there is no afterimage At a setting of 100 00 the afterimage does not decay 4 To erase the afterimage press KF Strobe Eraser turning it on Selecting the overlay priority fo
9. 274 Wipe Pattern List 335 x pu ddy x pu ddy DME VVipe Pattern List DME Wipe Patterns Available in One Channel Mode Slide 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 Split 1011 1012 336 DME Wipe Pattern List Squeeze 1023 10291 Bhat La 1030 1031 oe Door Flip tumble C 1101 1102 DME Wipe Pattern List 337 x pu ddy x pu ddy 338 Frame in out Picture in picture Page turn DME Wipe Pattern List o 1201 a 1202 4 1203 mas 1204 1251 x 1309 1310 1311187 K s fu wv A K rN 1313 KA Page roll 1325 y 1326 N 1327 y 1328 kt cys 1329 gt 1330 4 1331 A K 1332 K A 1333 gt A K User programmable DME 1901 11999 199 DME Wipe Pattern List 339 x pu ddy x pu ddy 340 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two Channel Mode Slide Squeeze 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 Picture in picture 2652 DME Wipe Pattern List
10. HF1 1ch 1161 HF2 2ch 1162 HF4 Edge Direction 1164 VF7 Misc HF5 Modify 1165 HF1 Transition 1171 HF2 Video Process 1172 HF3 Key Priority 1173 HF4 Next Key Priority 1174 Key Priority 1173 HF2 Edge 1112 atte Adjust 1112 1 Mix Ptn Select 1112 2 Zabton Adjust 1112 3 ask Ptn Select 1113 1 HF5 Processed Key 1115 Monitor 1115 1 HF6 Transition 1116 Wipe Adjust 1116 1 Pattern Select 1116 2 DME Wipe Adjust 1116 3 1ch Pattern Select 1116 4 HF7 Video Process 1117 ee eee The functions in the Key 2 to Key 4 menus are the same as those in the Key 1 menu with the following menu page numbers Key 2 menu 112x Key 3 menu 113x Key 4 menu 114x 4 Edge Direction 1154 Matte Adjust 1154 1 Mix Pattern Select 1154 2 HF5 Main Modify 1155 Multi Adjust 1155 1 HF6 Sub Modify 1156 Multi Adjust 1156 1 Menu Tree 343 x pu ddy x pu ddy 344 PGM PST Menu P P button PGM PST VF1 DSK1 HF1 Type 1411 Chroma Adjust 1411 1 VF2 DSK2 atte Adjust 1411 2 VF3 DSK3 Key Priority 1473 VF4 DSK4 HF2 Edge 1412 atte Adjust 1412 1 Mix Ptn Select 1412 2 Zabton Adjust 1412 3 HF3 Main Mask 1413 Mask Ptn Select 1413 1 VF5 Wipe VF6 DME Wipe VF7 Misc Menu Tree HF4 Sub Mask 1414 HF1 Main Pattern 1
11. cascccoses casszastessecstucseeteces 133 Setting the Keyframe 133 Seftinp ihe Elfeci lburatton usraaaaaaaxx x 7 134 SettinsetheDclayremcectece steerer ee eee 135 Rathi Se ttinOfscc ccssarscecsccsenessoccrccescucccescescecsectonsseccssceesasteaesesseatesesostesecssse 136 Basic Procedure for Path Settings e ee eae e 2 136 UXO CU LIN IB TLE CES issccessesteccsessescseceseotscctestesesencesocsecouccesssesccasensecasexessesces 140 Execution With the RUN Button Auto Mode 140 Run Vode Settin pe sete Bees ee eet erect ee 141 SAVIN Di EE a a 143 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 145 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block eee 145 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu 147 Register Operations in the Menus 150 Effect Attribute Settings 150 Effect Status DiS play oitir teneor eran ere roes eie 151 Effect Register 151 Sequence of Keyframe Operations The follovving table shovvs the principal operations involved in the sequence from creating keyframes to executing an effect For details of each operation see the page number in parenthesis For an overview see Keyframes in Chapter 1 Vo
12. 191 xoqlous n Si s ydeuo 178 Utility Execution You can assign actions such as menu shortcuts function enabling and disabling and recalling shotbox registers to buttons in the menu control block and utility shotbox control block Use the setup menu to make the assignment For details of the menu control block and utility shotbox control block see Menu Control Block and Utility Shotbox Control Block in Chapter 2 Volume 1 For details of the settings for assigning functions to buttons see Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu page 218 Executing a Utility VVith the User Preference Buttons Menu Control Block In the setup menu you can assign any eight actions to the user preference buttons in the menu control block To execute an assigned action Press the corresponding user preference button PREFS 11 to PREFS 8 e In the case of a function on off action the button you pressed lights amber and this enables the function To disable the function press the button once more e For other actions the button you pressed momentarily lights amber and then the function is executed Utility Execution Executing a Utility in the Utility Shotbox Control Block Bank selection buttons Memory recall buttons Utility shotbox cont
13. Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition H Degree of left and right separation 1 0 000 to 100 000 2 Transition V 1 Degree of top and bottom 0 000 to 100 000 separation To set the split position Use the follovving procedure 1 Press Position 2 Set the following parameters 52 Knob 1 Parameter H Adjustment Degree of left and right separation Setting values 4 000 to 4 000 DME Special Effect Operations Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 V Degree of top and bottom 3 000 to 3 000 separation Split Slide settings The Split Slide effect divides the image into bars vvhich slide alternately in reverse directions To apply the Split Slide effect With the Split Slide menu displayed set the following parameters suones do AWG 11 1080 Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition H 1 Degree of transition in horizontal 0 000 to 100 000 direction 2 Random H Degree of randomness in distance 0 00 to 100 00 moved by blocks in horizontal direction 3 Skew H Degree of skew in horizontal direction 0 00 to 100 00 4 Width H Horizontal width of partition 0 00 to 100 00 5 Angle Angle of partition line 8 000 to 8 000 6 Transition V 1 Degree of transition in vertical 0 000 to 100 000 direction 7 Random V Degree of randomness in distance 0 00 to 100 00 moved by block
14. and right edges DME Special Effect Operations 27 suones do IWA 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 28 Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top 0 00 to 2 25 and bottom edges 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all Value of H shown four edges 4 In the lt Edge Mode gt group select the type of edge Light effect of light striking the edge Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Adiust luminance of top edge 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Adiust luminance of left edge 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Adiust luminance of right edge 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Adjust luminance of bottom edge 1 100 00 to 100 00 5 All Simultaneously adjust luminance of Value of Left shown all four edges Color colored edges When this is selected set the following parameters in the lt Color Adjust gt group e To set the density Knob 1 Parameter Density Adjustment Adjust the color density Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 e To set the colors for each edge Top Left Right Bottom All Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 2 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 3 a For the All adjustment the value for Left is shown DME Special Effect Operations 5 To soften
15. 2 g 101064 144 6 Press the ENTER button This saves the current effect in the specified register and turns off the STORE button The RCALL button and STORE STATS button both light To undo the saving of an effect Immediately after saving an effect hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button to undo the save Saving Effects Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block Creating and saving a master timeline You can save region information information on any regions including the register numbers associated with the regions referred to as a master timeline in a dedicated register By recalling that register you can manipulate the regions and registers together To create and save a new master timeline use the following procedure 1 Press the EFF button turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to keyframe effect operations Recall the register number of the effect you want to save on the master timeline for each region See Recalling a Register page 115 Of the region selection buttons press those buttons for the regions you want to save on the master timeline turning them on Press the region selection button MASTR turning it on The display shows the number of the register last used for master timeline register operation
16. 2 Using any of the follovving methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Signal format screen aspect ratio 1 to selection 3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is high press H Set To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low press L Set This confirms the setting which appears in the status area Making DME GPI output settings Use the following procedure 1 In the DME gt Device Interface menu press DME1 GPI Output The 1 GPI Output menu appears The output port selection is fixed at 1 2 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger polarity Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level 3 Using any of the following methods select the action you want to set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting 2 Action Action selection 1 to 3 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values a Error Make Error Break No Action 4 Press Action Set to confirm the action selection
17. 281 Tally Generation Settings Tally Enable 283 Tally Copy Settings Tally Copy 2222 285 Parallel Tally Settings Parallel Tally 286 Serial Tally Settings Serial Tally 5522 288 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel290 Procedure for Simple 290 Setting Status of the MKS 8080 8082 in Simple Connection 290 Setup for the VVhole System Carry out operations relating to setup in the Engineering Setup menu To access the Engineering Setup menu press the top menu selection button ENG SETUP For an overview of setup see Setup in Chapter I Volume 1 Setting the unit ID VVhen there are tvvo svvitchers and connected DME units on the same netvvork it is necessary to set the unit ID on each device as follows Device ID 1st switcher 1 2nd switcher 2 Device ID DME for 1st switcher channels 1 to 4 DME for 2nd switcher channels 1 to 4 3 For more details of how to make the device ID settings refer to the installation manual for the particular device Network Settings Network Config Menu To display the Network Config menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF1 System and HF1 Network Config The status area shows the device ID and Control LAN and Data LAN
18. Press Rename The keyboard window appears See Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 Enter a name of not more than eight characters and press Enter The name you have entered is reflected in the status area Deleting Files You can delete data from the hard disk or memory card As an example to delete a snapshot file use the following procedure 1 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot The Snapshot menu appears The status area shows the device status and a list of files present on the device Operations on Individual Files 2 Press File Edit A detailed list appears Here too you can select a device or specify a directory See page 296 3 Using any of the following methods select the file you want to delete e To select all files within the list press All below the list e To select multiple files turn the knobs to select in the following ranges Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List Select the first file 1 to 99 2 Num Number to be selected 1 to 99 e To select a single file press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor or press directly on the list in the status area 4 Press Delete A confirmation message appears Select Yes to delete Select No to cancel the deletion Operations on Individual Files 301 s lli 21 seldeyo s li 21 sa deyo 302 File Ba
19. S IA Q eux Z 108 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 1084 98 press the START TC button Alternatively in the Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu enter the timecode for the start point If using the START TC button each time you press the button overwrites the start point timecode For details of settings in the Cueup amp Play menu see Setting the start point stop point and start delay time in a menu page 99 8 To set the stop point once again play back on the VTR disk recorder Find the desired stop point and at that point press the STOP TC button Alternatively in the Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu enter the timecode for the stop point If using the STOP TC button each time you press the button overwrites the stop point For details of settings in the Cueup amp Play menu see Setting the start point stop point and start delay time in a menu page 99 9 To set a start delay time press the DELAY button in the device control block and enter a value in the numeric keypad control block Alternatively make the setting in the Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu If no setting is required continue to step 10 For details of settings in the Cueup amp Play menu see Setting the start point stop point and start delay time in a menu page 99 1 the STORE button turning it on in the numeric keypad control block 1 1 Enter the number
20. 345 AUX NI NGM Tem aaa m 346 Copy S wap Menu s teeter steer terrence 346 MUSCAMEnu R 346 DMEM e 347 Coba M e rere 348 Device IM E N E OO O ON 348 Keyikrame Mienur a ress 349 PileciiMenn E tous 350 SnapshotiMlenuz n 351 SHOtOXVeM Ue Sees A R 352 Macronu KUSULU 352 PHE MEU 353 Enpimneerinp Setup Menun ee ee 5 354 VVipe Pattern List Standard VVipes IMME FBRGORE AA uA E ANNEE Appendix Wipe Pattern List 330 Enhanced Wipes Wipe Pattern List 331 i l 1 j o 2 x Rotary Wipes j i sl E 150 J 151 156 158 604 606 624 661 Appendix VVipe Pattern List 332 Mosaic VVipes Appendix 203 imi lm 202 l i 201 123 5 200 hal R 210 333 Wipe Pattern List 267 266 265 tI 094 CH gi rs CE m Miu ss kli gi 264 268 Appendix VVipe Pattern List 334 Random Diamond Dust Wipes 270 271 272 273
21. 4 Turn on the buttons of the graphics you want to show To show axes Turn Axis on To show axis names Turn Axis Name on To show the channel ID Turn Ch ID on To show a wire frame Turn Wire Frame on To show the grid Turn Grid on The selected graphics appear in the monitor screen 5 If you want to shrink the graphics display to show the range not displayed on a normal monitor turn the Scale button on and set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Scale Degree to which the graphics 0 00 to 100 00 display is shrunk As the value of the setting grows the monitor shrinks further toward the center point 20 Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 6 To automatically erase the graphic display vvhile the keyframes are executing press the Auto Erase button turning it on and then set the following parameter Knob 1 Parameter Recover Time Adjustment Time until graphic display appears again after keyframe execution Setting values 0 to 300 frames Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 21 suones do IWA 1010840 suones do AWG 0840 22 Canceling Virtual Images When a transformation is executed with an extreme degree of perspective the part of the image which is beyond the imaginary view point can wrap around and show on the other side The wrapped around portion is referred
22. Set the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Key Density 1 Key density 0 00 to 100 00 Key Source Selection Select the key signals for use as the front and back of the image DME Special Effect Operations 75 suones do IWA 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 Selecting the key source signals Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears 2 In the lt Front Key gt group or lt Back Key gt group respectively press one of the following turning it on Ext Key use the key signal sent from the switcher as the key source Int Key use the DME internal key signal as the key source Interpolation Settings Specifies the interpolation method for input video signals and input key signals For an overview of interpolation see Interpolation in Chapter I Volume 1 Selecting an interpolation method for input video signals Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF3 Process 2 In the lt Video Field Frame Mode gt group select the interpolation method for the video signal Adaptive Y C Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance components of the video signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames Adaptive Y Detect changes in the luminance component of the video signal separately and s
23. User programmable DME 2901 201 e 2999 299 DME Wipe Pattern List 341 x pu ddy x pu ddy Menu Tree Recalling Menus This section details the menu structure and shovvs the top menu selection buttons in the menu control block vvhich are used to access the menus Top menu selection buttons Menu control block Some menus can also be accessed by pressing other buttons tvvice in rapid succession For more details see Menu Organization in Chapter 2 Volume 1 M E 1 to M E 3 Menus The functions in the M E 1 M E 2 and M E 3 menus are the same but the menu page numbers are distinguished as follovvs M E 1 menus 11xx M E 2 menus 12xx M E 3 menus 13xx In this section the numbers for the M E 1 menus are given as examples 342 Menu Tree ME ME ME M E 1 M E 2 and M E 3 buttons M E 1 VF1 Key1 HF1 Type 1111 Chroma Adjust 1111 1 VF2 Key2 atte Adjust 1111 2 VF3 Key3 VF4 Key4 HF3 Main Mask 1113 HF4 Sub Mask 1114 VF5 Wipe HF1 Main Pattern 1151 HF2 Pattern Mix 1152 HF3 Sub Pattern 1153 VF6 DME Wipe ee
24. Menu Tree x pu ddy x pu ddy Global Effect Menu GLB EFF button Global Effect VF1 Ch1 Ch4 HF1 Combiner 4211 VF2 Ch5 Ch8 HF2 Brick 4212 HF3 Shadow 4213 HF1 Combiner 4221 HF2 Brick 4222 HF3 Shadovv 4223 Device Menu DEV button Device VF1 GPI Timeline 5311 Rewind Action 5311 1 VF2 P BUS Timeline 5321 Rewind Action 5321 1 VF3 DDR VTR HF1 Cueup amp Play 5331 Revvind Action 5331 1 HF2 Timeline 5332 Rewind Action 5332 1 HF3 File List 6333 Menu Tree Key Frame Menu A KEYFRAME button M E 1 6113 1 M E 2 6113 2 M E 3 6113 3 P P 6113 4 User1 6113 5 User2 6113 6 User3 6113 7 User4 6113 8 User5 6113 9 User6 6113 10 User7 6113 11 User8 6113 12 DME 3D Trans Local 6113 13 DME 3D Trans Global 6113 14 DME Effect 6113 15 DME Global Effect 6113 16 Key Frame HF1 Time Line 6111 HF3 Path 6113 HF4 DME User PGM 6114 HF5 Misc 6115 Menu Tree 349 x pu ddy x pu ddy 350 Effect Menu Menu Tree EFF button VF1 Master Timeline VF2 Effect HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6 HF7 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6 HF7 Store 6211 Edit 6211 1 Lock 6212 Copy 6213 Move 6214 Swap 6215 Delete 6216 Rename 6217 Attribute 6221 Lock 6222 Copy Merge 6223 Move 6224 Swap 6225
25. Modifying tally generation Use the following procedure 1 2 3 In the Router Tally gt Tally Enable menu press Modify The Modify menu appears With reference to steps 2 to 5 in the preceding section Making new tally generation settings change the parameters as required Press Execute This modifies the tally generation settings Deleting tally generation settings Use the following procedure 1 Using either of the following methods in the Router Tally Enable menu select the tally generation entry you want to delete e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Press Delete This deletes the selected tally generation entry 284 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally Tally Copy Settings Tally Copy Menu For settings relating to the tally copy function use the Router Tally gt Tally Copy menu The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies To display the Tally Copy menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF5 Tally Copy The status area shows the tally copy status Making new tally copy settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Router Tally gt Tally Copy menu select New The New menu appears 2 Turn the knob to select the copy from source Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Copy From From Copy from source sta
26. and HF6 Operation The status area shows the items that can be set and a list of the settings Setting the on air tally To set the high tally state reflected on the control panel select any of the following in the lt Button Tally gt group System The overall system tally state is reflected on the control panel Independ The tally state of the switcher only is reflected on the control panel Setting the transition rate display mode To determine whether to display transition rate values in menus and on the control panel in frames or as timecode values select one of the following in the lt Trans Rate Display gt group Frame display in frames Timecode display as timecode SS FF Making settings relating to effects To make settings relating to the functions used when carrying out keyframe effect operations use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Operation menu press Effect Mode The Effect Mode menu appears 228 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel The status area shovvs a list of the items vvith their settings Make the follovving settings as required Effect recall mode To select the state of the first keyframe vvhen an effect is recalled select Recall the first keyframe is not recalled or Recall amp Rewind the first keyframe is recalled in the lt Recall Mode gt group Automatically turning EDIT ENBL off When an effect is recalled with the EDIT ENBL button on t
27. 10 Table of Contents Chapter 11 DME Operations Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 13 Basic Operations 13 Three Dimensional Parameter Display 17 Entering Three Dimensional Parameter Values 18 EES I DI BIEN oore ae o 0000000007 19 Gancelino n Le a E E 00 22 DME Special Effect Operations 23 23 Gropisetting s r 25 BeyelediEdpe Sett nossr 000 27 29 30 Multi Moye Settings ae eree 31 LUNES A 32 M Oo Y 33 Posterization and Solarization Settings 33 ING SAPS ETM OSs ae 34 Contras Seti SS O ee ee ee ee ee 34 N 35 36 NonlincamEtiect Settings te 37 BEV OHM SAS CLUIM ESS verre cess 64 ATAU SCtun SS ete a Mira s te N 67 Motion DecayaSetuim oss es et 70 Keyirame S iro beyScilino sos 71 Backsround Settna Sre ri K 73 Separate Sides SetINES eee E 74 Invert Settna r r r 74 Keyilbensityesettino ssa 75 I EATE AO a 75 Interpolation 8001 85
28. 100 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 8 000 to 8 000 100 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 8 Offset A 3 Direction along periphery in 8 000 to 8 000 which to offset ripple phase and amount of movement 9 Speed A 5 Ripple direction along periphery 100 00 to 100 00 and speed a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off When Shape mode is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp R Ripple amplitude 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq R Ripple frequency 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset R3 Direction in which to offset ripple 8 000 to 8 000 phase and amount of movement 4 Speed R Ripple direction and speed 100 00 to 100 00 5 Shape Ripple shape 1to4 6 Aspect Ripple aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 7 Angle Ripple angle 8 000 to 8 000 a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off c 1 Circle Circle 2 Rectangle Rectangle 3 Star Star 4 Heart Heart To limit the direction in which modulation is applied By pressing Plus Only turning it on you can limit the direction in which modulation is applied the direction in which the image expands to the plus direction only To set the ripple center point Use the following procedure 1 Press Position turning it on 2 Set the following paramete
29. 12 is the number of the currently recalled register Pressing this button 1 saves the macro and the Flexi Pad section svvitches back from macro editing mode to the recall operation 0 PAUS Tol mode 4 In the same vvay as in the numeric keypad control block create the events you vvant to save in the macro For details see step 2 page 312 of Creating a new macro Repeat step 4 to save the desired events in the macro The operations you carry out on the control panel are saved as a sequence of events in the macro The numeric display appears as follows Example Total number of events Position of last saved event Press the STORE XX button in the memory recall section where XX is the register number The STORE STATS button lights amber This saves the created macro in the register and macro editing ends The Flexi Pad control block returns to the state before macro editing began The MCRO button lights amber e During macro editing you can press a mode selection button in the Flexi Pad control block other than the MCRO button for example the WIPE button or DME button to record the executed operation as an event In this case the MCRO button remains lit red e During macro editing if you press a button for which a macro attachment is set the macro within the register assigned to the button is Macro Operations in the Fle
30. 5 Press Source Address Set This confirms the setting Clearing a source address setting To clear a source address setting for a particular bit In the Source Assign menu select the serial tally port and bit number see steps 2 and 3 in the previous item then press Clear This clears the source address setting for the selected bit To clear all source address settings In the Source Assign menu select the serial tally port then press All Clear A confirmation message appears e If you select Yes this clears all source address settings the selected serial tally port e If you select No the clear operation is canceled Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 289 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel Procedure for Simple Connection To carry out simple connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel use the follovving procedure For settings on the MKS 8080 8082 refer to the section Making the Setting VVith Buttons Setup Function in the Operation Manual for the MKS 8080 8082 1 2 Carry out initialization of the MKS 8080 8082 settings This can be done on the MKS 8080 8082 separately Set the MKS 8080 8082 station number in the range 2 to 17 This can be done on the MKS 8080 8082 separately Set the S BUS data link primary station to the CCP 8000 Center Control Panel
31. Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 VVidth VVidth of partition 0 000 to 100 000 2 Random Degree of randomness in partition 1 0 000 to 100 000 vvidth 3 Angle Starting angle of effect 8 000 to 8 000 DME Special Effect Operations 49 suones do AWG 11 11084 suones do JWA 0840 3 To set the ring center position press Position and set the following Adjustment Horizontal center position Setting values 5 000 to 5 000 parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 H 2 V Vertical center position 4 000 to 4 000 4 To partition into pixels press Pixel turning it on and set the following Adjustment Degree to which image disappears around periphery Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 Density 2 Random Degree of jaggies at block edges 0 00 to 100 00 Broken Glass settings The Broken Glass effect partitions the image like broken glass with shards flying outward To apply the Broken Glass effect Display the Broken Glass menu The functions of the knobs in the Broken Glass menu are the same as those of the Rings menu with the exception of Direction For details about operation see Rings settings page 49 To fix the direction in which shards scatter Press Direction turning it on Flying Bar settings The Flying Bar effect divides the image into bars which peel off in two block
32. Recall P P DSK4 SS Recal No Action When Source Device is DCU No Action e Action list when the trigger type is Status When Source Device is SCU 1 1 SS Recall M E1 Key2 SS Recall M E1 Key3 SS Recall M E1 Key4 SS Recall M E2 1 SS Recall M E2 2 SS Recall M E2 Key3 SS Recall M E2 Key4 SS Recall M E3 Keyl SS Recall M E3 Key2 SS Recall M E3 Key3 SS Recall M E3 Key4 SS Recall P P DSKI SS Recall P P DSK2 SS Recall P P DSK3 SS Recall P P DSK4 SS Recall 1 Keyl On 1 Key2 On 1 Key3 On 1 Key4 On M E2 Keyl On M E2 Key2 On M E2 Key3 On M E2 Key4 On M E3 Keyl On M E3 Key2 On M E3 Key3 On M E3 Key4 On P P DSKI On P P DSK2 On P P DSK3 On P P DSK4 On Error Make Error Break No Action When Source Device is DCU Error Make Error Break No Action 6 To confirm the selection press Action Set This confirms the selection which appears in the status area Test firing the trigger To test fire the trigger in the DCU gt GPI Output menu press Test Fire This outputs a trigger from the selected output port This is not output when the trigger type is Status 2 2 Setup Relating to DCU Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign Menu To set the protocol to match a device connected to a 9 pin serial port display the DCU gt Serial Port Assign menu To display the Serial Port Assign menu In Engineering Setup select VF5
33. Set the STATION ID switches 5903 on the front of the CA 45 board in the SCU SLOT 1 to 001 switch 1 only to the OPEN position In the Engineering Setup gt System gt Initialize menu select PNL and carry out a reset This carries out a restart and when the restart is completed connection to the MKS 8080 8082 is possible In the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Router menu set the position of the DVS 9000 system in S BUS space Select the setting from SWR1 and SWR2 and set each of Source Destination and Level to 1 Setting Status of the MKS 8080 8082 in Simple Connection As a result of making the simple connection the MKS 8080 8082 operates in AUX bus mode and the settings are the following factory defaults Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel VVith regard to the meaning of the follovving settings refer to the section Menu Operations in the Operation Manual for the MKS 8080 8082 C SET SWITCHER ID for AUX mode This is set to 001 which is the station number of the CCP 8000 D SET AUX DESTINATION SOURCE for AUX mode The source is set to IN001 and following and destination is set to OUTOO and follovving H SET PHANTOM TABLE for Router mode This is unset since the unit does not operate in router mode N SET PANEL TABLE for Router mode The source is set to IN001 and following and destination is set to OUTOO and following However since the unit does not operate i
34. The part of the image defined by Top Left Right and Bottom is magnified or shrunk to fit into Side V or Side H To invert the image in a side face For example to invert the image on the front of Side H in the lt Side Front group press the following buttons turning them on Invert H To invert horizontally Invert V To invert vertically For the images on the other faces use a similar operation in the following groups e Back image of Side H lt Side Back group e Front image of Side V lt Side V Front group e Back image of Side V lt Side V Back gt group Crop Magnified or shrunk to fit Set automatically Compress Cropped region Global Effect Operations 83 Knob _ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Position of top crop 2 25 to 2 25 2 Left Position of left crop 4 00 to 4 00 3 Right Position of right crop 4 00 to 4 00 4 Bottom Position of bottom crop 2 25 to 2 25 5 Rotation Angle of rotation when rotated 1 0 90 180 270 around the Z axis of the source space suones do AWG 11 1 1 84 suones do AWG 0840 84 Shadovv Settings This effect uses tvvo successive channels to give an image a shadovv For an illustration see Global Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Appiying the Drop Shadovv effect Use the follovving procedure 1 In the Global Effect gt Ch1 Ch4 menu select HF3 Shadow
35. The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open circuit or drives the output high and holds this state for the specified pulse width The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted or drives the output low and holds this state for the specified pulse width _X_ Each time the trigger occurs the relay contacts are alternately closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level Turning the knobs select the pulse width and timing to be set Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 fields 4 Timing Output timing 1 to 32 a 1 Field 1 2 Field 2 3 Any When gt C is selected as the trigger polarity there is no Pulse Width setting When Status is selected there is no Pulse Width or Timing setting In the lt Source gt group select the action block M E 1 to M E 3 and P P Set an action for the M E or PGM PST bank Common Set an action for error status Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 225 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 6 Using any of the following methods select the action to be set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the ar
36. e Bar e Preset lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects You cannot select Bar for an image subjected to a nonlinear effect Applying the Lighting effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF5 Light Trail and HF1 Lighting The Lighting menu appears DME Special Effect Operations 2 3 Press Lighting turning it on The Lighting effect is enabled In the lt Light Pattern gt group select the lighting pattern Plane Bar or Preset You can adjust the intensity of the light and other parameters with the knobs Set the parameters The parameters differ as follows depending on the selected lighting pattern e When Plane is selected Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Light Intensity of light in highlight area 0 00 to 100 00 e When is selected Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Light Intensity of light in highlight area 0 00 to 100 00 2 Ambient Intensity of light in ambient area 0 00 to 100 00 e When Preset is selected Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Light Intensity of light in highlight area 0 00 to 100 00 Ambient Intensity of light in ambient area 0 00 to 100 00 Shade Intensity of light in shade area 10 00 to 100 00 2 a Setting is available when nonlinear effect page turn roll cylinder or sphere is selected Shade area Ambient area
37. 8 000 to 8 000 modulation range 3 Size V Amount of vertical wave 0 00 to 100 00 modulation 4 Offset V Center point of vertical 8 000 to 8 000 e When Size mode is selected Knob Parameter 1 Size H Adjustment Amount of wave modulation Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 2 Offset H Center point of modulation range 8 000 to 8 000 DME Special Effect Operations Size Envelope Offset To smooth the range envelope vvhen the vvave range is limited Use the follovving procedure 1 Press Range Envelope turning it on 2 Set the follovving parameters e When H amp V mode is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Envelope H 1 Smoothness of envelope in 0 00 to 100 00 horizontal direction 2 Envelope V 1 Smoothness of envelope in vertical 0 00 to 100 00 direction When Size mode is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Envelope H 1 Smoothness of envelope 0 00 to 100 00 To reverse the vvave range Use the follovving procedure To reverse the horizontal wave range set with Range Press Range Rev H turning it on To reverse the vertical wave range set with Range Press Range Rev V turning it on Mosaic Glass settings The Mosaic Glass effect makes the image rougher and finer at a specified interval DME Special Effect Operations 43 suones do AWG 11 1 1
38. A keyboard window appears You can enter a name of not more than 16 characters If no name is set for the serial port it is displayed as DCUd_PORTs p d 1 or 2 DCU No s 1 to 5 Slot No p 1 to 6 Port No 6 Press Enter To return the set name to the default name Press Clear in the lt Name gt group T From the lt SCU Select gt group select the control panel SCU1 SCU2 or SCU3 assigned to operations on the external device connected to the serial port To delete the serial port assignment Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt Serial Port Assign menu select the target for the setting DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group 2 Using any of the following methods specify the serial port e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Port No Serial port 1 to 30 3 Press Clear Making detailed settings on the external device connected to the serial port After setting the external device for each serial port it is necessary to make further detailed settings for operation of the external device To make detailed settings for a VTR Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt Serial Port Assign menu select the target for the setting DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group 274 Setup Relating to DCU U
39. Bank 0 11010 Bank 1 11 to 20 Bank 2 21 to 30 Bank 3 31 to 40 Bank 4 41 to 50 Bank 5 51 to 60 Bank 6 61 to 70 Bank 7 71 to 80 Bank 8 81 to 90 Bank 9 91 to 99 Example When you select bank 3 the register numbers allocated to the memory recall section are as follows 37 l 38 l 39 Gaia a A 34 35 l 36 SS 31 32 33 SUES E 40 Operations with a simple type Flexi Pad control block With a simple type Flexi Pad control block the registers that can be handled are numbers 1 to 8 Bank operations are therefore not possible It is also not possible to apply attributes or to cancel a snapshot save or recall operation once carried out To use registers 9 to 99 or to cancel a snapshot save operation use the numeric keypad control block Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 165 sjoysdeus p 19 deyo s ousdeuS p 1 6 Saving and Recalling Snapshots Saving a snapshot vvith the Flexi Pad control block As an example to save a snapshot on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 bank make the settings for the state you want to save as a snapshot 2 In the M E 1 bank Flexi Pad control block press the SNAPSHOT button This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to snapshot operations The numeric display shows the last selected bank number a
40. Delete 6226 Rename 6227 Snapshot Menu siort SNAPSHOT button Snapshot VF1 Master Snapshot VF2 Snapshot VF3 Wipe Snapshot VF4 DME Snapshot VF5 Key Snapshot HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6 HF7 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6 HF7 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6 HF7 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6 HF7 HF1 2 4 HF5 HF6 HF7 Store 6311 Lock 6312 Copy 6313 Move 6314 Swap 6315 Delete 6316 Rename 6317 Attribute 6321 Lock 6322 Copy 6323 Move 6324 Swap 6325 Delete 6326 Rename 6327 Lock 6332 Copy 6333 Move 6334 Swap 6335 Delete 6336 Rename 6337 Lock 6342 Copy 6343 Move 6344 Swap 6345 Delete 6346 Rename 6347 Attribute 6351 Lock 6352 Copy 6353 Move 6354 Swap 6355 Delete 6356 Rename 6357 Edit 6311 1 XPT Hold 6321 1 Menu Tree 351 x pu ddy x pu ddy 352 Shotbox Menu SHOTBOX button Shotbox VF1 Register HF1 Store Recall 6411 HF2 Lock 6412 HF3 Copy 6413 HF4 Move 6414 HF5 Swap 6415 HF6 Delete 6416 HF7 Rename 6417 Edit 6411 1 Macro Menu MCRO button Macro VF2 Attachment Menu Tree File Menu n FILE button File HF1 Setup 7111 File Edit 7111 1 HF2 Initial Status 7112 File Edit 7112 1 VF1 Setup Init KMem VMem 1 HF3 Key Memor
41. If there are files you do not want to recall in the lt Category gt group exclude them from the operation For details of the data to which operations apply see Files in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Press the Load button A confirmation message appears e Select Yes to carry out the batch recall e Select No to cancel the batch recall Batch Deleting Files To delete files from hard disk or memory card use the following procedure 1 2 In the device selection area of the All menu select where the files are held IHDD or Memory Card and directory See page 296 Press the Delete All button A confirmation message appears e Select Yes to delete all files from the selected directory e Select No to cancel the batch delete File Batch Operations 303 s li 21 seldeyo Importing and Exporting Files You can import or export frame memory image data from or to external media Import to transfer a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card to frame memory as image data Export to change the file format of register data and save the data on hard disk or memory card To carry out these operations use the Files AlI External File gt Import Export menu For details of the formats supported for import and export see Files in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Displaying the Import Export Menu In the File menu select VF6 All External File and
42. Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal defocusing of video 0 00 to 100 00 signal 2 V Vertical defocusing of video 0 00 to 100 00 signal 3 All Horizontal and vertical H value shown defocusing of video signal 5 To cancel black level leaking that can occur at the edge of the screen when the Defocus effect is enabled press Clean Defocus turning it on Blur Settings This effect blurs the entire image Applying the Blur effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and 1 Defocus Blur The Defocus Blur menu appears 2 Press Blur turning it on The Blur effect is enabled You can adjust the blurring of video and key signals with the knobs 30 DME Special Effect Operations 3 Set the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal defocusing of video 1 0 00 to 100 00 and key signals 2 V Vertical defocusing of video and 1 0 00 to 100 00 key signals 3 All Horizontal and vertical H value shown defocusing of video and key signals Multi Move Settings This effect shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and horizontally For an illustrative figure and other information see DME Special Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Applying the Multi Move effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF2 Multi Move T
43. M E 3 and PGM PST regions Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block sjoysdeus p s d sjoysdeus p s deu USER 1 to USER 8 These select the USER regions DME 1 to DME 4 These select DME channels ALL This selects all regions The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block See Assigning the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block page 210 The first button pressed lights green as the reference region and any subsequently pressed buttons light amber For details of the precedence order for becoming the reference region see Regions and Registers in Chapter I Volume 1 The display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the register previously recalled for that region Press the STORE button turning it on Enter the desired register number from the numeric keypad To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the period button again If you choose a register which already contains a snapshot and save a snapshot then the existing register contents are overwritten The register number appears in the display If the number is followed by a letter e or E this indicates the following e The selected regis
44. Only the key modifier settings are saved or recalled Transition Only the independent key transition settings are saved or recalled Creating and Saving a Master Snapshot To save a master snapshot in the Snapshot menu after recalling the Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store menu refer to the operations in Creating and Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu page 147 Recalling the Store menu Carry out the following procedure 1 Do either of the following e In the menu control block press the top menu selection button SNAPSHOT e In the numeric keypad control block press the SNAPSHOT button twice in rapid succession The Snapshot menu appears 2 Press VF1 Master Timeline and HF1 Store The Master Snapshot gt Store menu appears The status area shows the master snapshot register names register lock status register number for each region and so on 3 If required press the following buttons in the status area to change the region display M E P P indicate assignment of M E 1 M ET M E 2 2 M E 3 M E3 and P P P P Snapshot Operations in the Menus User User1 98 1 to User8 USRS DME indicate assignment of DME 1 DMET ch2 DME2 ch3 and ch4 DME24 Snapshot Register Editing You can carry out the following editing on snapshot registers You can use similar procedures also on maste
45. change the parameters as required In this case however it is not possible to specify multiple destinations in a single operation and a single Destination Address must be specified Press Execute This updates the wiring settings Deleting wiring settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Router Tally gt Wiring menu using either of the following methods select the wiring whose settings you want to delete e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Press Delete This deletes the selected wiring entry 282 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally Sorting vviring settings m the Router Tally gt Wiring menu press Sort Every time you press Sort the order of wiring settings changes in the follovving order Destination lever order Destination address order Source level order Tally Generation Settings Taliy Enable Menu For settings relating to tally generation use the Router Tally gt Tally Enable menu The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies To display the Tally Enable menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF4 Tally Enable The status area shows the tally generation settings Making new tally generation settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Router Tally gt Tally Enable menu press New The New menu appears 2 Turn the knobs to set the
46. space but the S Bus space can be used efficiently 3 Turn the knobs to set the parameters for the following items Source Specify the start address of the matrix source Destination Specify the start address of the matrix destination Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally Level Specify the level in the S Bus space Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adiustment Setting values 1 Source Source start address 1 to maximum value 2 2 Destination 1 Destination start address 1 to maximum value 2 3 Level Level 1to8 a When the matrix size is Standard the maximum value is 889 For the Compact size the maximum value is 897 b When the matrix size is Standard the maximum value is 887 For the Compact size the maximum value is 897 Making an external box setting Use the following procedure 1 In the Router Tally gt Router menu press External Box Assign The External Box Assign menu appears The status area shows the external box size address and other settings In the lt Device gt group select what the setting applies to External Box 1 to 4 In the lt Matrix Size gt group select the number of inputs No Assign Do not use 8x1 Select an external box with 8 inputs and 1 output 16x1 Select an external box with 16 inputs and 1 output 32x1 Select an external box with 32 inputs and 1 output Turn the knobs to make adjustments Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 So
47. with shards page 50 flying outward Flying Bar Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks page 50 as they move Blind Divides the image into bars or wedges with blocks page 51 rotating like the slats of venetian blinds Split Splits the image upper and lower left and right page 52 Split Slide Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in page 53 reverse directions Mirror Partitions the image vertically and horizontally creating page 53 an image like a reflection in a mirror Multi Mirror Divides the image into originals and reflections lining page 54 them up vertically and horizontally Kaleidoscope Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope page 55 Lens Creates an image like a view through a lens page 56 Circle Makes a circle with the image page 57 Panorama Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to page 57 emphasize the sense of perspective Page Turn Turns the image like a turning page page 58 Roll Rolls the image up page 59 Cylinder Winds the whole image onto a cylinder page 59 Sphere Winds the whole image onto a sphere page 60 Explosion Divides the image into fragments which expand as they page 60 fly out Swirl Swirls the image page 61 Melt Melts the image away from a specified part page 62 Character Extends the edge of the image like a trail page 64 Trail It is not possible to apply two or more nonlinear effects at the same time Turning any nonlinear eff
48. 4 In the lt Parallel Input Assign gt group press No Assign GPI Input Setting GPI Input Assign Menu To set the trigger type and so on for each GPI input display the DCU gt GPI Input Assign menu To display the GPI Input Assign menu In Engineering Setup select VF5 DCU and HF2 GPI Input Assign The GPI input port setting status appears in the status area Making DCU GPI input settings Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt GPI Input Assign menu using any of the following methods select what the setting applies to e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area 266 Setup Relating to DCU e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 No Parameter Adjustment GPI input Setting values 1 to 50 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger polarity Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input pulse X_ Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal Level Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or high No Operation Apply no trigger on an input pulse In the lt Target Device gt group select the control panel to handle the GPI input SCU1 IDI control panel PNL1 SCU2 ID2 control panel PNL2 SCU3 ID3 control panel PNL3 The action setin the following step 4
49. Assigning the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block page 210 It is not possible to select MASTR and other regions simultaneously If selected simultaneously the master timeline takes precedence The first button pressed lights green as the reference region and any subsequently pressed buttons light amber For details of the precedence order for becoming the reference region see Regions and Registers in Chapter I Volume 1 The display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the last register recalled for this region Enter the number of the register you want to recall using the numeric keypad To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the button again To search for an empty register in the 100 range press 1 01 0 L1 period in this order Similarly to search for an empty register in the 200 range press 2 0 0 period The register number appears in the display If the number is followed by a letter e or E this indicates the following e The selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 2 E The selected register is empty for all currently selectable regions Recalling a Register 4 To apply a temporary attribute effect dissolve press the EFF DISS button It is not possible to
50. BKDS 9470 the following setting is always selected Multi Do interpolation using 8 by 8 pixels DME Special Effect Operations 77 suones do IWA 1010840 suones do JWA 0840 78 Global Effect Operations Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of successive channels The follovving types of global effects are available e Combiner e Brick e Shadow For details of these global effects see Global Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Operations common to all global effects In this section explanations of the operating procedures for individual global effects begin with selections from VF1 Ch Ch4 in the Global Effect menu The following are common operations that you must do prior to selecting from this menu 1 In the device control block select the target DME channel 2 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button GLB EFF then select VF1 Chl Ch4 The Global Effect gt Ch1 Ch4 menu appears Combiner Settings By using combiners you can freely combine up to three continuous channels from among four channels You can also combine channels and 2 and channels 3 and 4 pairwise The setting menu differs according to the combiner usage status This section shows the cases of Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 and Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 as examples Setting the combiners Use the following procedure 1 In the Global Effect
51. Config menu press M E Output Assign The M E Output Assign menu appears 2 On the list in the status area select the bank output to be assigned The selected output appears in reverse video 3 In the lt M E Output Assign gt group select the output signal to be assigned To set the output configuration for each bank When you selected Multi Program or DSK in the procedure described in Setting the operation mode page 235 use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Config menu press PGM Config The PGM Config menu appears The status area shows the background and key configuration assigned to the output of each bank 2 Using either of the following methods select the output for which you want to make the setting e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor The selected output appears in reverse video 3 In the lt Bkgd gt group select the background In Multi Program mode select Clean or Utility2 then skip to step 5 In DSK mode select one of Bkgd1 to Bkgd4 4 In DSK mode turn the knobs to select the background signal Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2105 Bkgd1to4 1 Background signal selection 1 to 18 2 a 1 to 6 M E1 OUTI to 6 7 to 12 M E2 OUTI to 6 13 to 18 M E3 OUT to 6 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 5 In each of the lt Key1 gt to lt Key4 gt groups selec
52. DCU and HF5 Serial Port Assign The serial port setting status appears in the status area Making serial port settings Use the following procedure 1 2 In the DCU gt Serial Port Assign menu select the target for the setting DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group Using any of the following methods select the serial port e Press directly on the list on the left of the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Port No Serial port 1 to max 3 a The setting value range depends on the DCU port setting Using any of the following methods select the protocol for the connected device e Press directly on the list on the right of the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Device Type Protocol selection 110 42 a 1 No Assign nothing is connected to the serial port 2 P Bus P Bus device 3 VTR VTR 4 DDR SD9P disk recorder Sony disk 9 pin protocol Press Device Type Set The selected protocol is reflected on the left of the status area Setup Relating to DCU 273 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 5 To enter the name of the serial port press Set in the lt Name gt group
53. Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 1 ID Device ID 0 to 23 2 In the Device gt P Bus Timeline menu press Direct Store The numeric keypad window appears 3 Enter the register number for which you want to carry out the Learn The setting range is from 1 to 99 4 Press Enter This carries out a Learn with the specified register number Control of P BUS Devices 89 S 1A Q eux Z 08 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 1084 90 P BUS Trigger P BUS trigger is a function vvhereby a button operation in the numeric keypad control block or keyframe control block outputs an action command to a P BUS device To use the P BUS trigger function the P BUS control mode must be set to Trigger Make this setting in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface menu see page 226 The relation between the operation in each of the control blocks and the action command output is as follows Action command for an operation in the numeric keypad control block e RECALL Recall e STORE Store This recalls the register specified in the numeric keypad control block and a Recall or Store is carried out according to the setting Action command for an operation in the keyframe control block e RUN Trigger 1 e REWIND Trigger 4 e NEXT KF Trigger 7 e PREV KF Trigger 8 Outputting an action command As an example to output a Recall use the following procedure 1 In the numeric key
54. Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Action No Action 1042 Control of P BUS Devices 87 S 1A Q eux Z 108 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 seldeup a 1 Off no specification 2 Store 3 Recall 4 Trigger 4 If in step 3 you selected 2 Store 3 Recall or 4 Trigger turn knob 3 to select the register number or trigger number The indication for knob 3 changes to reflect the selection of Store Recall or Trigger Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Store No Register number for Store 1 to 99 3 Recall No Register number for Recall 1 to 99 3 Trigger No Trigger number 010 15 The setting is reflected in the list on the right of the status area 5 Press Set For the device selected in the list on the left of the status area this sets the action specified in step 4 Repeat steps 2 to 5 as required for other devices Testing an action command To produce a test output of the action command press Test Fire The action command is output from the 9 pin serial port of the DCU according to the setting in the list on the left of the status area Clearing an action setting To clear the setting for separate devices Use the following procedure 1 In the list on the left of the status area select the device for which you want to clear the action setting 2 In the list on the right select Off 3 Press Set To clear the action settings for all
55. Press the STORE button turning it on With the numeric keypad buttons enter the number of the register in which you want to save the master timeline To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button The display shows the register number If the number is followed by a letter E the register is empty Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 145 spay sajdeyo soy g 101064 146 7 Press the ENTER button The regions selected in step 3 and the register numbers recalled in those regions are saved in the master timeline register and the STORE button goes off At the same time the RCALL button lights e Itis not possible to undo a master timeline save e Saving the master timeline does not carry out a save of effects Save the effects for each region first then carry out the master timeline save Amending a master timeline You can amend information already saved in a master timeline As an example to change the M E 1 register from Effect 5 to Effect 10 use the following procedure Information in master timeline register 1 before change Region Register M E 1 Effect 5 M E 2 Effect 5 Information in master timeline register 1 after change Region Register M E 1 Effect 10 M E 2 Effect 5 Recall the master timeline register you want to amend See Recalling a Registe
56. R Center of modulation range 8 000 to 8 000 along radius 3 Size A Amount of ripple modulation 0 00 to 100 00 along periphery 4 Offset A Center of modulation range 8 000 to 8 000 48 DME Special Effect Operations To reverse the ripple range Use the follovving procedure When modulation mode is Radial Both or Shape Press Range Rev R turning it on When modulation mode is Both or Angular Press Range Rev Al turning it on Other settings You can turn Lock Form Random and Range Envelope on to do the following e Stop the waves e Select the wave shape e Randomize the waveform e Smooth the range envelope when the wave range is limited For Lock Form Random and Range Envelope functions see Wave settings page 39 Rings settings The Rings effect partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving in the same direction To apply the Rings effect With the Rings menu displayed use the following procedure 1 To make transition settings press Transition and set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Degree of transition 0 000 to 100 000 2 Random Degree of randomness in distance 0 000 to 100 000 moved by each block 3 Spiral Amount of movement toward 1 000 to 1 000 periphery accompanying transition 2 To set the partition method press Partition and set the following parameters
57. Setting values 1 Number Number of blocks 0 00 to 100 00 2 Phase Angle of partition reference point 8 000 to 8 000 3 Offset H Amount of horizontal offset 4 000 to 4 000 4 Offset V Amount of vertical offset 3 000 to 3 000 To reflect the kaleidoscope image as if in a mirror Use the following procedure 1 To reflect in the horizontal direction press Mirror H turning it on 2 To reflect in the vertical direction press Mirror V turning it on To set the reflection position Use the following procedure 1 Press Position turning it on DME Special Effect Operations 55 suones do AWG 11 1 10640 suones do JWA 0840 56 2 Set the follovving parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal reflection position 0 000 to 4 000 2 V Vertical reflection position 0 000 to 3 000 To cyclically repeat part of the original and its reflection Press Cyclic turning it on Lens settings The Lens effect creates an image like a view through a lens To apply the Lens effect With the Lens menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the lt Mode gt group select the lens shape e Circle e Rectangle e Star e Heart e Bar Cross 2 Depending on the selected lens shape set the following parameters e When Circle Rectangle Star or Heart is selected Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Magnify H Magnificat
58. Switcher and HF1 Config The status area shows the output signal assignment for each operating bank Adjusting the reference phase To adjust the switcher internal reference phase adjust the following parameter in the Switcher gt Config menu Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Phase Switcher internal reference phase 32 00 to 96 00 Specifying the video svvitching timing m the lt Switching Timing gt group of the Switcher gt Config menu select one of the follovving Any Not specified Field 1 Field 1 odd fields Field 2 Field 2 even fields Setting the operation mode In the lt M E Config gt group of the Switcher gt Config menu select the operation mode for each M E or P P bank from the following e Standard mode e Multi Program mode e DSK mode P P only For details of the modes see Switcher Setup in Chapter I Volume 1 When Multi Program mode is selected two or more transition type indication may light It is also possible that more than one Transition Type has been selected in the Misc gt Transition menu for each M E Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 235 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 236 To assign the output of each bank in Multi Program mode When you selected Multi Program in the procedure described in Setting the operation mode page 235 use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt
59. The selected signal appears in reverse video Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 241 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 sajdeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 4 Press Set to confirm the assignment Selecting the output signal to which settings apply In the following video clip adjustment vertical blanking interval adjustment and through mode setting and safe title setting use either of the following methods to select the output signal before making the setting e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to move the reverse video cursor The selected output signal appears in reverse video Adjusting the video clip To adjust the clip value for each of the output signals from the Output 1 to 48 ports use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Output menu press Video Clip The Video Clip menu appears The status area shows the output ports and assigned signals and the white clip dark clip and chrominance clip values 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 White Clip Luminance signal white clip value 90 00 to 109 02 2 Dark Clip Luminance signal dark clip value 6 85 to 10 00 3 Chroma Clip Chrominance signal clip value 90 00 to 113 17 To set the values to the default values press Default Making vertical blanking interval adjustment and through mode settings Use the following procedure
60. To display the Output menu m the Engineering Setup menu select VF3 Svvitcher and HF3 Output The status area shovvs the signal numbers and names and output signal phase for the signals output from Output 1 to 48 Assigning output signals To assign a signal to output from an output port use the follovving procedure 1 m the Switcher gt Output menu press Output Assign The Output Assign menu appears The status area shows the output ports and assigned signals on the left and a list of signals that can be assigned on the right In the lt Output Assign gt group select any of the following Re Entry Source It is possible to make duplicate assignments M E 1 Output 1 to 6 M E 2 Output 1 to 6 M E 3 Output 1 to 6 3 PGM PST 1 to 6 DME Monitor Video DME Monitor Key a M E output signals selected in the M E Output Assign menu Aux Bus It is not possible to make duplicate assignments Preset Edit Preview AUX 1 to 48 Using any of the following methods select the output port number and signal to be assigned e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area to make the selection e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Output No Output port number 1 to 48 2 Source No Selection of signal to be assigned e For output ports not to be assigned press Inhibit
61. UNDO button STORE STATS button XPT HOLD ABU U 1234 MCRO button Bank selection buttons Memory recall section t is not possible to carry out macro operations with a simple type Flexi Pad control block Banks and registers To allow operations on the 99 registers the standard type Flexi Pad control block treats the registers in groups These groups are called banks and there are 10 banks numbered from 0 to 9 316 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block For details of the correspondence between banks and registers see Banks and Registers page 165 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro To carry out a macro operation recall a macro register To recall a macro register use the following procedure 1 m the Flexi Pad control block press the MCROT button turning it on This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operations The numeric display shows the previously selected bank number and the last recalled register number 2 Use any of the following operations to select the bank for recall To select bank 0 Press the BANKO button To select bank 1 Press the BANK1 button To select any of banks 0 to 9 Press the BANK SEL button changing the memory recall section display as shown below select a number
62. Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify menu appears 2 Press Sepia turning it on The Sepia effect is enabled You can adjust the degree of mixing between the sepia image and the original image with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Y Y signal mix amount 0 00 to 100 00 Mix C Chroma signal mix amount 0 00 to 100 00 Mix All Y signal and chroma signal mix Mix Y value shown amount 32 DME Special Effect Operations 4 To set the color of the sepia image press Sepia Color turning it on and adjust the parameters Mono Settings This effect converts the image into a monochrome image Applying the Mono effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify menu appears 2 Press Mono turning it on The Mono effect is enabled The color image changes to monochrome Posterization and Solarization Settings The Posterization and Solarization effects both give a painting like effect by coarsening the gradations of the image The Posterization effect coarsens luminance gradations and the Solarization effect coarsens chroma gradations Applying the Posterization or Solarization effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify men
63. Wipe Patterns Available in One Channel 336 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two Channel Mode 340 Menu 342 Recalling 342 1 to M E 3 Menus 222 342 hid a tee 344 Frame Memory rasiri ona 345 Color Bk gd Men s is irpini 345 346 346 MISC 346 DME MENU csse laya RUSYALI 347 Global Effect MEDU sirke ere tereo 348 Device MENU sisi ci oeeie sasa 348 Key Frame Mentan L S 349 Effeci Men i ea E e SE 350 Snapshot Menu na anti Atop eg EE eres 351 Table of Contents Shotbox Meni a de si 352 Macro Menu E AR 352 Pile Menu s b d D s m A E E 353 Engineering Setup Menu cscscsesecsneesscencsverstsenevenseseeseesesesses 354 index 357 Table of Contents 9
64. a name of not more than eight characters and press Enter A new directory with the name you have entered appears in the status area Renaming a Directory To rename a directory use the following procedure 1 In the device selection pull down menu select HDD or Memory Card See page 296 2 Using any of the following methods select the directory e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor 306 Directory Operations Turn the knob to make the selection Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 List Directory selection 1to 3 Press Rename The keyboard window appears See Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 4 Enter a new name of not more than eight characters and press Enter The new name appears in the status area Deleting a Directory To delete a directory use the following procedure 1 In the device selection pull down menu select HDD or Memory Card See page 296 2 Using any of the following methods select the directory e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List Directory selection 1 to 3 Press Delete A confirmation message appears e Select Yes to delete the directory e Select N
65. after the current keyframe In constant duration mode the moved keyframe overwrites the edit point To insert the moved keyframe before a keyframe Hold down the SHIFT button and press the PASTE button to insert the moved keyframe before the current keyframe Copying Copying keyframes Use the following procedure 1 2 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on Stop the effect at the edit point you want to copy To copy a number of keyframes in a single operation press the FROM TO button or the ALL button turning it on For how to specify a range of keyframes see Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously page 122 Press the COPY button This copies the specified keyframe and saves it to the paste buffer Move the edit point to the position where you want to insert the copied keyframe Press the PASTE button This inserts the keyframe you have copied after the current keyframe In constant duration mode the copied keyframe overwrites the edit point To insert the copied keyframe before a keyframe Hold down the SHIFT button and press the PASTE button to insert the copied keyframe before the current keyframe Creating and Editing Keyframes 127 spay 08 s 2 43 g 4210640 128 Pause To apply a pause to a keyframe use the following procedure 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the
66. and press Enter The set name is reflected in the status area Register Operations in the Menus 155 spay 8 soy Jae deyo 156 Register Operations in the Menus Chapter 14 Snapshots Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 158 Saving and Recalling 8 5 6 2 222 2222 159 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 164 Banks and Reistersos 0000000 165 Saving and Recalling 5 6 6 2222 166 Snapshot Operations in the Menus 170 Seftinps napshotztinibulos snaaxx225500000000 7 ae 170 SnapshotStatusiDIsplayo e eee ee 0000000000 172 Setting Key Snapshot 5 2222 173 Creating and Saving a Master Snapsheot 174 Snapshot Resister Editino aa cece E rence sence sce ease 175 sjoysdeus p s deu 158 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block The term snapshot refers to a function whereby the various settings required to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data for recall as required to recover the same effect applied state For an overview of snapshots see Snapshots in Chapter I Volume 1 You can carry out snapshot operations principall
67. area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Bus Bus name selection 3 Num Select number of buses e To select all registers press AlI 3 Press On This enables cross point hold on the selected bus or buses To switch cross point hold off press Off To apply the effect dissolve attribute 1 Press Effect Dissolve turning it on 2 Turn the knob to set the effect dissolve duration Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Duration Dissolve duration 0 to 999 frames To apply the auto transition attribute Press Auto Transition turning it on To apply the GPI output attribute 1 Press GPI Output turning it on Snapshot Operations in the Menus 171 sjoysdeus p sjoysdeus p s deu 2 Turn the knob to set the port number Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 GPI Out GPI output port number 1to 8 Port For details of attributes and available attributes see Snapshots in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Snapshot Status Display The Snapshot gt Attribute menu displays the following information For details of how to access the Snapshot gt Attribute menu see page 170 Region name The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Register number Register name VVrite protected status V
68. bank for recall See step 3 page 166 in Saving a snapshot with the Flexi Pad control block 3 To apply temporary attributes press the following buttons turning them on Control block Temporary Button attribute to apply Cross point control A B bus cross point XPT HOLD button in the block hold background A B bus Key cross point hold IXPT HOLD button in the key bus 2 Key disable XPT HOLD button in the key bus gt Flexi Pad control Effect dissolve EFF DISS button pock Auto transition AUTO TRANS button a When Xpt Hold mode is selected in setup b When Key Disable mode is selected in setup For details of temporary attributes and available attributes see Snapshot Attributes in Chapter 1 Volume 1 e The cross point hold and key disable settings are maintained until you next press the XPT HOLD button e Applying temporary attributes does not affect the contents of the register 4 Press the button in the memory recall section which shows the desired register name The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the snapshot The numeric display shows the selected register number after the bank number To cancel a snapshot recall operation After recalling a snapshot to cancel the recall press the UNDO button 168 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block Deleting a snapshot from a Flexi Pad control block As an example to delete a snaps
69. block 0 000 to 100 000 3 To set the partition method press Partition and set the following parameters e When Bar was selected in step 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 VVidth VVidth of partition 0 000 to 100 000 2 Offset Degree of randomness in partition 5 000 to 5 000 vvidth 3 Angle Starting angle of effect 8 000 to 8 000 e When Wedge was selected in step 2 Knob 4 No Parameter Adjustment Width of blocks Setting values 0 000 to 100 000 DME Special Effect Operations 51 suones do IWA 11 110840 suones do JWA 0840 Knob Parameter Phase Adjustment Partition position Setting values 8 000 to 8 000 To set the wedge center position When Wedge is selected in the lt Mode gt group you can set the wedge center posit ion 1 Press Position 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal center position 8 000 to 8 000 2 V Vertical center position 6 000 to 6 000 Split settings The Split effect splits the image upper and lower left and right To apply the Split effect With the Split menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the lt Mode gt group select the split method Single Leave gaps between splits Double Fill gaps between splits with the same image 2 Set the following parameters
70. carrying out the operation 1 2 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This enables effect editing in the keyframe control block Create the image you want to be the first keyframe Press the INS button This takes the current image as the first keyframe You can make a setting in the Setup menu so that when you recall an empty register the system state at that point is automatically captured as the first keyframe Create the image you want to be the next keyframe Press the INS button This inserts the current image as the second keyframe after the first keyframe Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create the required number of keyframes To insert a new keyframe before an existing keyframe Hold down the SHIFT button and press the INS button to insert a new keyframe before the current keyframe Creating and Editing Keyframes Insertion Inserting keyframes To insert a keyframe in an existing effect use the following procedure in the keyframe control block 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the desired edit point 3 Create the image for the keyframe you want to insert 4 Press the INS button When the edit point is on a keyframe to insert the new keyframe before the existing keyframe hold down the SHIFT button and press the INS button This inserts the current image as the new keyframe Inserting a keyframe may change the total duration of the effect See
71. destination To provide links betvveen the svvitcher bus and routing svvitcher destination make the follovving settings as required Matrix selection Select the target of link setting from the eight matrices 1 to 8 Matrix position definition Set the start address and level for the source and destination on the S Bus Link table setting Link a svvitcher cross point button and matrix source Link bus setting Link a svvitcher bus address and routing svvitcher destination To select a matrix number Use the follovving procedure 1 In the Panel gt Config menu press External Bus Link The External Bus Link menu appears The status area shows the current link status 2 Turn the knobs to select the matrix Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Link No Link number 1 to 64 2 Link Matrix 1 Matrix number 1108 In the status area the color of the selected part changes 3 Press Link Matrix Set This confirms the matrix selection and the selected part in the status area returns to the previous color To delete a link With the link selected press Clear To define the position of a matrix Specify where in the 1024 x 1024 S Bus space the link matrix is to be provided by setting the source and destination start address For the matrix selected in the External Bus Link menu use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Config gt External Bus Link menu press Link Matrix Adjust Th
72. devices in a single operation Press Off 88 Control of P BUS Devices Setting the action for a rewind operation On the P BUS timeline when the REWIND button in the keyframe control block is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting in the Device gt P Bus Timeline menu press Rewind Action to recall the Rewind Action menu In this setting screen use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the P BUS timeline Alternatively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details of the setting see Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is executed page 229 Carrying out a Direct Store You can carry out a Learn with the register number specified for the device selected in the menu Use the following procedure 1 Using any of the following methods select the device e Press directly on the list on the left of the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection
73. disk recorder information press VF3 VTR and HF1 Cueup amp Play or HF2 Timeline in the Device menu The Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu or Device gt DDR VTR gt Timeline menu appears and a list shows the timecode information and operating status for each device The columns of the list show the following information DEV device name DEV1 to DEV12 represent respectively device 1 to device 12 Reg register Number of the register to which settings apply Status Status of each device The meaning of the indications is as follows XXXX Communications with the device are being carried out normally but status information is not received Local The REMOTE LOCAL switch of the device is set to LOCAL Tape Out No tape is loaded Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 95 SadlAeq eux Z 108 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 1064 96 Cue gt Cueing up in the forward direction Cue lt Cueing up in the reverse direction Eject Ejecting cassette Stb Off Stopped in standby off mode Stop Stopped in standby on mode Play Playing FF Fast forwarding Rewind Rewinding Shtl gt Playing in the forward direction in shuttle mode Shtl lt Playing in the reverse direction in shuttle mode Var gt Playing in the forward direction in variable mode Varc Playing in the reverse direction in variable mode Jog gt Playing in the forward direction in jog mode Jog lt Playing
74. e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Register Register number 1 to 99 3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99 e To select all registers press All Register Operations in the Menus 5 Press Effect Dissolve turning it on 6 Turn the knob to set the duration Knob Parameter 2 Duration Adjustment Dissolve duration Setting values 0 to 999 frames Effect Status Display The Effect gt Effect menu displays the following information Region name The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Register number Register name Write protected status When the register is write protected a letter L appears Empty status When the register is empty a letter E appears Effect Register Editing You can carry out the following editing on effect registers and master timeline registers Lock Write protect the contents of the register Copy Copy the contents of one register to another register Merge Merge the data of two registers It is not possible to merge master timeline registers Move Move the contents of one register to another register Swap Swap the contents of two registers Delete Delete the contents of a register Name Attach a name to a register Write protecting the contents of the effect register Use the follow
75. following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Destination Address Destination address 1 to 1024 2 Destination Level Destination level 1108 3 Tally Type Tally type 1082 a When you selected Group to 4 in the section Setting the tally groups page 280 this is 1 R1 2 G1 3 R2 4 G2 5 R3 6 G3 7 R4 and 8 G4 When you selected Group to 8 this is 1 R5 2 G5 3 R6 4 G6 5 R7 6 G7 7 R8 and 8 G8 R is an abbreviation of Red Tally and G of Green Tally 3 In the lt Tally Enable gt group specify the tally generation mode Enable Always generate a tally Disable Never generate a tally Tally Input Generate a tally from the tally input state Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 283 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 saydeyD 4 When you selected Tally Input as the tally generation mode in step 3 select any of the following in the lt Tally Input gt group Generate tally with reference to signal input to DCU1 port Set the port number with the knob DCU2 Generate tally with reference to signal input to DCU2 port Set the port number with the knob Turn the knob to select the tally input port number Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 5 Input No Tally input port number 1 to 102 Press Execute This sets the settings made in steps 2 to 5 as the settings for tally generation
76. for M E 1 M ET M E 2 M E2 M E 3 M H3 and P P P P User Shows the allocations for User1 USRT User2 USR2 User3 USR3 User4 USR4 User5 USR5 User6 USR6 User7 USR7 and User8 USRS DME Shows the allocations for DME 1 DMET ch2 DME2 ch3 and ch4 4 Dev1 8 Shows the allocations for Device DEVI Device2 DEV2 Device3 DEV3 Device4 DEVA Device5 DEVS Device6 DEV6 Device7 DEV7 and Device8 DEVS Dev9 12 Shovvs the allocations for Device9 DEV9 Device10 DEV 10 Device11 DEV11 and Device12 DEV12 Mise Shovvs the allocations for P BUS PBUS GPI GPT and Router RTR Using any of the follovving methods select the register you vvant to create or edit e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to select a register Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Shotbox Reg Shotbox register number 1 to 99 Press Edit The Edit menu appears and it is now possible to make the settings for the specified register You can also use knob to select the register in this menu In the status area the shotbox register status for each region appears Shotbox Reg
77. gt Aux Assign menu Hold Acts as a shift button and the shifted version of the AUX delegation buttons is enabled while the button is held down Lock Acts as a shift button and pressing the button toggles between the shifted version and the unshifted version of the AUX delegation buttons Off Acts as an AUX delegation button In a 16 button system it acts as button number 16 in a 24 button system as button number 24 and in a 32 button system as button number 32 dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu To assign functions to the user preference buttons PREFS 1 to PREFS 8 in the menu control block and the memory recall buttons in the utility shotbox control block display the Panel gt Prefs Utility menu To display the Prefs Utility menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF4 Prefs Utility The status area shows the settings of the user preference buttons Assigning functions to user preference buttons Use the following procedure 1 Using any of the following methods select the button to be assigned e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No User preference button selection 1 to 8 2 In the lt Action gt group select the function to be assigned Menu Shortcut Assign a frequ
78. in the reverse direction in jog mode Current Shows timecode for current device position Start TC Shows timecode for start point set on device Stop TC Shows timecode for stop point set on device Speed Shows the variable speed set for each device Delay Shows start delay time set on device Cueup amp Play Using the device control block or Device menu you can carry out Cueup amp Play settings VTR or disk recorder start point stop point and start delay time and save the settings in an effect register By recalling this register you can carry out automatic control of the VTR or disk recorder e In an effect register set on the VTR disk recorder timeline Cueup amp Play settings are not possible To add Cueup amp Play settings to such a register first clear the VTR disk recorder timeline setting before carrying out the operation e When using a disk recorder with Cueup amp Play if you carry out the following sequence of operations the system may freeze on the frame of the start point 1 Press the RUN button to play to a point close to the end of a file 2 Stop playback 3 Press the RUN button once more In such cases first recall a different register then carry out the following sequence 1 Recall the original register again 2 Press the REWIND button 3 Press the RUN button Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders Making and saving settings relating to Cueup amp Play Use the following pro
79. is selected for the setting In this case the initial status of the control panel applies only to the key bus delegation button settings 3 When Custom mode is selected in each of the lt Setup gt group and lt Initial Status gt group select one of the following User When this is on user defined settings are used for the Setup or Initial Status settings For the method of saving the user defined settings see the next item Factory When this is on factory default settings are used for the Setup or Initial Status settings 4 To confirm the settings press Execute If you want to cancel the setting changes without saving them press Clear When Execute is pressed a confirmation message appears 5 Select Yes The start up state settings are saved Saving user defined settings To save the Setup settings Use the following procedure 1 After selecting the devices the settings apply to in the System gt Start Up menu press Setup Define A confirmation message appears 200 Setup for the Whole System 2 Press Yes This saves the setup settings for the selected devices in non volatile memory within the respective devices To save the Initial Status settings Use the following procedure 1 After selecting the devices the settings apply to in the System gt Start Up menu press Init Status Define A confirmation message appears Press Yes This saves the initial status settings other than th
80. is reflected in the status area In the utility shotbox control block the assigned button lights orange If a shotbox register was assigned the register name appears To cancel an assignment After selecting the relevant button press Clear Assigning a menu shortcut to a memory recall button in the utility shotbox control block Use the following procedure 1 Referring to the procedure up to step 3 in the previous item select Menu Shortcut The memory recall buttons in the utility shotbox control block flash orange Using any of the following methods display the menu to which you want to make a shortcut e In the menu control block press the relevant top menu selection button then select VF and HF e Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu screen then enter a menu number from the numeric keypad window e Press a particular control panel button twice in rapid succession In the utility shotbox control block select the bank and press the button to which you want to assign the shortcut The menu screen goes back to the Prefs Utility gt Utility Module Assign menu and the selection is reflected in the status area The buttons in the utility shotbox control block stop flashing and the button to which the menu shortcut is assigned lights orange Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 221 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 To abandon
81. it on Making video process settings Use the follovving procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Input menu press Video Process The Video Process menu appears The status area shows the source number source name and video process adjustment settings 2 Using any of the following methods select the input signal to which the settings apply e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 6 Parameter Src No Adjustment Input signal selection Setting values 1 to 80 3 Press Video Process turning it on 4 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Video signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Y signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level 1 Black level 7 30 to 109 58 To set the parameter settings to their defaults press Unity Enabling the illegal color limiter To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the switcher internal matte generator press Matte Illeg Col Limit in the Switcher gt Input menu turning it on Signal Output Settings Output Menu For setup relating to signal outputs use the Switcher gt Output menu 240 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
82. it on The display in the numeric keypad control block shows the current keyframe number followed by TO 5 Enter the number of the last keyframe to be modified from the numeric keypad control block and press the ENTER button to confirm 6 Press the MOD button Alternatively hold down the SHIFT button and press the MOD button For the difference in the result see Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified page 124 This makes the modification simultaneously to all keyframes from the edit point to the specified keyframe Creating and Editing Keyframes To modify all keyframes in the effect Use the follovving procedure 1 2 3 4 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on Carry out the necessary modifications on any keyframe Press the ALL button turning it on Press the MOD button Alternatively hold down the SHIFT button and press the MOD button For the difference in the result see Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified page 124 This makes the modification simultaneously to all keyframes in the effect To modify the keyframes in a specified range Use the following procedure 1 2 3 4 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on Stop the effect at any keyframe within the range to be modified Carry out the necessary modifications Press the FROM TO button turning it on The display in the numeric keypad con
83. later assigned device selection button takes priority and the previous selection is invalidated Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make assignments to other ports Sharing disk recorder file lists Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Device Interface gt Serial Port Assign menu select the disk recorder whose files you want to share with other disk recorders e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Serial port selection 1 to maximum 2 a The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 227 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo 2 Turn the knob to select the device selection button DEV1 to DEV12 for sharing the file list Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 File List Device selection button for 1 to 12 sharing the file list 3 Press Same File List Set This is reflected in the file list in the status area 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 as required to select other devices for sharing the file list dnjes 9 3010640 Operation Settings Operation Menu To make settings relating to panel operation use the Panel gt Operation menu To display the Operation menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel
84. master Linking does not apply to a transition carried out with the downstream key control block Selecting the module to be the reference for device control block In the lt Reference Module gt group of the Panel gt Config menu select the module to be the reference e Trackball e Joy Stick Assigning the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Config menu press 10 Key Region Assign The 10 Key Region Assign menu appears On the left of the status area the region selection buttons are shown and on the right a list of the assignable regions Press the indication for the button you want to assign The button you pressed turns to reverse video Using any of the following methods select the region to be assigned e Press directly on the list e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor 210 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Region Region selection 1 to 35 Press Set to confirm the selection This assigns the region to the region selection button in the numeric keypad control block To return the region assignments to the factory default In the 10 Key Region Assign menu press Default This returns the assignments of the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block to the factory defau
85. menu appears 34 DME Special Effect Operations Press Contrast turning it on The Contrast effect is enabled You can adjust the luminance and chroma contrast with the knobs Set the parameters Offset L Video input Video input Clip level level Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Y Gain Luminance contrast gradient 100 00 to 100 00 3 Y Offset Luminance offset level 100 00 to 100 00 increment 4 C Gain Chroma contrast gradient 100 00 to 100 00 Video output level Video output level Clip Gain Offset Mosaic Settings This effect divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic For an illustrative figure and other information see DME Special Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Applying the Mosaic effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF4 Mosaic The Mosaic menu appears DME Special Effect Operations 35 suones do WA 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 2 Press Mosaic turning it on The Mosaic effect is enabled You can adjust the size and aspect ratio of the mosaic tiles with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Size of tiles 0 00 to 100 00 2 Aspect Aspect ratio of tiles 100 00 to 100 00 2 a Specify minus values to stretch the tiles in the vertical direction and plus val
86. move swap 152 data deletion 154 editing 151 merge 153 naming 154 write protecting 151 Engineering setup 193 Engineering Setup menu 354 Enhanced wipes 331 Explosion settings 60 External box setting 279 device control 86 F Fade to black function 245 File menu 353 File operations 106 batch operations 302 copying 299 Index 357 x pul 358 deleting 300 303 directory operations 306 displaying menus 294 import export 304 individual files 294 recalling 298 303 renaming 300 saving 297 302 selecting a device 296 selecting regions 296 vievving detailed informa tion 294 Film effect 37 Flag settings 44 Flexi Pad settings 230 Flip tumble 337 Flying bar settings 50 Formatting a memory card 203 Frame in out 338 memory data export 305 memory data import 304 Memory menu 345 Freeze settings 36 Function assignment user prefer ence buttons 218 links 249 Functions assignable to track ball Z ring 16 G Global Effect menu 348 effect operations 78 GPI device control 91 devices 86 output port settings 91 timeline creation editing 91 GPI input settings for control panel 223 for DCU 266 for DME 261 ndex for switcher processor 254 GPI output settings for control panel 225 for DCU 270 for DME 263 for switcher processor 256 Graphics display 19 H Hard freeze effect 36 Illegal color limiter 240 261 Initialization 201 Installation 202 Interpolation settings 76 Invert set
87. numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block to macro editing The MCRO button and STORE button in the numeric keypad control block and the EDIT ENBL button in the keyframe control block light red The AUTO INS button in the keyframe control block also lights and the auto insert function is enabled As in step 2 page 312 of Creating a new macro create an event This adds the new event after the last event executed in step 1 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 313 90 81 1 86 soe 81 131deyo 314 4 5 6 Repeat step 3 to add the desired events to the macro In the numeric keypad control block press the MCRO button turning it red Press the STORE button This completes macro editing and the MCRO and STORE buttons in the numeric keypad control block light amber The keyframe control block returns to the state before macro editing began Save the macro in the numeric keypad control block For details of the method of operation see Saving a Macro page 314 Inserting a pause event Use the following procedure 1 In the keyframe control block press the PAUSE button lighting it green The numeric keypad control block display shows PAUSE 2 With the buttons in the numeric keypad control block enter the length of the pause 1 to 999 frames 3 Press the ENTER button This sets the pause length and inserts the
88. occurs if the first keyframe in the loop range the start point is deleted 1 2 3 4 2 3 5 6 Before deletion 1 222222 4 1 After deletion TT7 TT TT 7 Deletion 5 6 7 Loop range Undoing an Edit Operation To undo a keyframe insert modify delete or paste operation immediately after execution press the UNDO button Creating and Editing Keyframes 131 5109 8 910 2 g 121064 132 Duration Mode Setting There are tvvo keyframe duration modes variable duration mode and constant duration mode in which the effect duration is fixed See Duration modes in Chapter 1 Volume 1 e To select variable duration mode turn the CONST DUR button off e To select constant duration mode press the CONST DUR button turning it on Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DME To create an effect for user programmable DME it is necessary to set the transition mode Setting the transition mode Use the following procedure 1 2 In the Key Frame menu select HF4 DME User PGM The DME User PGM menu appears In the lt Transition Mode gt group select the transition mode according to the DME wipe action Single select single transition mode Dual select dual transition mode Frame I O select frame in out transition mode P In P select pict
89. of stardust 100 00 to 100 00 a The way in which the trail disappears is affected by both the Decay and Dust parameter adjustments for the keyframe strobe Disabling the keyframe strobe afterimage Press KF Strobe Disable turning it on If you turn this function on when creating a keyframe even as the effect passes a keyframe no afterimage remains Background Settings This effect adds a color to the background of the image Applying the Background effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF1 Bkgd DME Special Effect Operations 73 suones do IWA 1010840 suones do JWA Jaldeuo The Bkgd menu appears 2 Press Bkgd turning it on The Background effect is enabled You can adjust the parameters with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Separate Sides Settings This effect applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back of the image For an illustration of the concept of front and back see DME Special Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Applying the Separate Sides effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears 2 Press Se
90. pause event Saving a Macro To save a macro you have created or edited use the following procedure 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the MCRO button turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to macro operations Press the STORE button turning it on Enter the number of the register in which you want to save the macro with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block The display shovvs the corresponding register number A letter E after the number indicates that the corresponding register is empty 4 Press the ENTER button This saves the macro data in the specified register and the STORE button goes off The RCALL and STORE STATS buttons light To cancel the saving of a macro To cancel the saving of a macro immediately after performing it hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 315 90 81 49 d5E02 soley 81 1080 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block This section describes how to carry out macro operations in a standard type Flexi Pad control block For an overview of macros see Macros in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Macro operations with the Flexi Pad control block use the following buttons Numeric display
91. ranges Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List L Select the first register whose data is to 11 to 99 be saved Operations on Individual Files 297 s lli 21 seldeyo s lli 21 4a deyo 298 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 List R Select the first file to which data is to be 1 1 to 99 saved 3 Num Number of registers to be selected 1 to 99 e To select a single file press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor or press directly on the list in the status area 5 Press Save This saves the selected register data in the specified location If there is already data in the specified location a confirmation message appears e Select Yes to overwrite the data e Select No to cancel saving all of the data Recalling Files As an example to recall a snapshot file from hard disk or memory card to a register use the following procedure 1 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot 2 In the device selection area on the left select Register 3 In the device selection area on the right select where the file is held IHDD or Memory Card and then specify a directory See Selecting a Device for Operations page 296 4 Using any of the following methods select the register to which you want to recall and the file to be recalled e To select all files within the list pres
92. restored Creating and Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu You can save a master timeline using the Effect gt Master Timeline gt Store menu Recalling the Store menu Carry out the following procedure 1 Do either of the following e In the menu control block press the top menu selection button EFF e In the numeric keypad control block press the EFF button twice in rapid succession The Effect menu appears Press VF1 Master Timeline and HF1 Store The Master Timeline gt Store menu appears Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 147 spay 910 2 g 4010640 148 The status area shows the master timeline register names register lock status register number for each region and so on If required press the following buttons in the status area to change the region display M E P P indicate assignment of M E 1 M ET M E 2 M E2 M E 3 M E3 and P P P P User indicate assignment of User1 USRT User2 USR2 User3 USR3 User4 USR4 User5 USR5 User6 USR6 User7 USR7 and User8 USRS DME indicate assignment of DME ch1 DMET ch2 DME2 ch3 DME3 and ch4 4 Dev1 8 indicate assignment of Devicel DEV1 Device2 DEV2 Device3 DEV3 Device4 DEV Device5 D
93. set to Off Enable When the fader lever is split the split fader effect is enabled Disable Even when the fader lever is split the normal fader lever effect is obtained Enabling or disabling the fade to black function In the lt FTB gt group of the Transition menu press the program output name to toggle between On and Off On When the FTB button is pressed a fade to black is carried out Off Even when the FTB button is pressed no fade to black is carried out The PGM2 to PGM4 settings are only valid in Multi Program mode or DSK mode Setting a preset color mix Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Transition menu press Preset Color Mix The Preset Color Mix menu appears Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 245 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 246 The status area shovvs the stroke mode setting for each M E bank the setting for whether or not the key status is maintained and the one time mode setting 2 In the lt Stroke Mode gt group select whether to carry out a transition in one stroke or two strokes Normal Carry out a preset color mix with two transition operations Single Carry out a preset color mix with a single transition operation 3 In the lt Non Drop Key gt group select the key setting for a transition including a key To carry out the transition with the key state maintained press Key1 to Key4 turning them on See Tran
94. switcher bus and the routing switcher destination to be linked to the switcher bus e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the selection Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 2 nternal Bus 1 Svvitcher bus selection 1 to 128 3 Destination 1 Routing svvitcher destination selection 1 to 128 3 To confirm the bus selected in step 2 press Master Bus Set and to confirm the destination press Linked Dest Set This confirms the selection which is reflected in the status area Linking transitions between keyers Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Config menu press Key Trans Link Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 209 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 The Key Trans Link menu appears The status area shovvs the keyers for each M E bank and the linked keyers Using any of the follovving methods select the keyer to be the master e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Master Key Select keyer to be master 1 to 16 The selected keyer appears in reverse video In the lt Key Select gt group select the keyer to be linked to the transition of the
95. the inside of the edges and the boundaries between adjacent edges turn on Edge Soft and adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 nner Soft Softness of the inside of edges 0 00 to 100 00 2 Bound Soft 1 Softness of the edge boundaries 0 00 to 100 00 Bound Soft Inner Soft Defocus Settings This effect defocuses the entire image For an illustrative figure and other information see DME Special Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Applying the Defocus effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF1 Defocus Blur 2 The Defocus Blur menu appears Press Defocus turning it on The Defocus effect is enabled You can adjust the defocusing of video and key signals with the knobs In the lt Defocus gt group select the signal to which to apply the defocus effect Video Key Video signal and key signal Video Video signal only DME Special Effect Operations suones do JWA 11 s deu suones do JWA 0840 4 Set the parameters When Video Key is selected Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal defocusing of video 1 0 00 to 100 00 and key signals 2 V Vertical defocusing of video and 1 0 00 to 100 00 key signals 3 All Horizontal and vertical H value shown defocusing of video and key signals e When Video is selected
96. the process of menu shortcut assignment m the Prefs Utility gt Utility Module Assign menu press Menu Shortcut This exits the menu shortcut assignment mode Setting names to be displayed in memory recall buttons The name you set using the following procedure is displayed only when Menu Shortcut or Utility Command has been assigned to the selected memory recall button To set a name for display in a memory recall button to which Shotbox Recall has been assigned use the Shotbox menu Use the following procedure 1 In the Prefs Utility gt Utility Module Assign menu select the button using any of the following methods e Press directly on the list e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Bank Bank selection 1104 2 Button Control block button selection 1 to 24 2 Press Name A keyboard vvindovv appears 3 Enter a name of not more than eight characters and press Enter The name you have set is reflected in the status area and on the memory recall button in the utility shotbox control block Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu To carry out setup relating to connections with external devices display the Panel gt Device Interface menu To display the Device Interface menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF5 Device I
97. the set start point and stop point e Press the Set button and adjust the parameter with the knob Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 2 Variable Variable speed 100 to 200 3 a The setting range of the variable speed depends on the type of connected device The new variable speed setting is reflected in the status area Repeat steps 2 to 11 as required for other devices To carry out start point and stop point settings and cueing up operations in the device control block With the following buttons in the device control block you can set the start point or stop point of a keyframe point on the VTR disk recorder timeline or carry out a cueing up operation Check that the MENU button in the device control block is lit green If it is not lit press it turning it on START TC button Set the start point of the keyframe point to the current time Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders STOP TC button Set the stop point of the keyframe point to the current time CUE button Cue up to the start point set for the keyframe point To display or check the settings use the Device gt DDR VTR gt Timeline menu To test an action command output To test an action command output select the desired device from the upper list in the status area and press Test Fire An action command is output from the DCU 9 pin serial port according to the settings in the list To clear the start point stop po
98. the show key function Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu press Show Key The Show Key menu appears 2 In the lt Show Key Enable gt group press the signal for which show key is enabled turning it on 3 To set the time for which show key is held press Hold Time 4 Adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Hold Time Show key hold time 0 to 999 frames Settings for DSK auto drop function Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu press DSK Auto Drop The DSK Auto Drop menu appears 2 In the lt DSK Auto Drop gt group press one of DSK1 to DSK4 for which you want the DSK to be deleted automatically turning it on Automatically naming and saving to frame memory In the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu press FM Auto Store turning it on Selecting the bank to which the settings apply For the section Selecting the key memory mode and subsequent sections select the operating bank to which the settings apply using any of the following methods then make the settings Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 247 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting value
99. the x axis rotate the trackball horizontally Parameter values increase as you rotate to the right and decrease as you rotate to the left e To change on the y axis rotate the trackball vertically Parameter values increase as you rotate upward and decrease as you rotate downward Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 15 suones do IWA 11 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 e To change on the z axis rotate the Z ring Parameter values increase as you rotate clockvvise and decrease as you rotate counterclockvvise However when you have pressed the LOC XYZ button to move the image z axis parameters increase as you rotate counterclockwise and decrease as you rotate clockwise If you hold down the SRC or TRGT button while carrying out the above operations the rate of change of the parameters is reduced Fine mode 5 To restrict the change in the transformation to a specific axis press the X Y or Z button tuning it on This enables the trackball and Z ring operations on the selected axis only Functions assignable to trackball and Z ring operations Button Usable coordinate 1 Trackball x Trackball y Z ring space direction direction LOC XYZ Source target Move image on x Move image on y Move image on z axis axis axis ROT Source target Rotate image on y Rotate image on x Rotate image on z axis axis axis SHIFT Source targe
100. this case always eight characters Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel dm s Suu ul5uz 91 sajdeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 2 In the Name Display Mode gt group select the method of display in the source name displays Auto Optimize display according to number of characters A name of up to tvvo characters appears as tvvo characters in one line A name of up to four characters appears as four characters in one line Otherwise up to the first eight characters are shown in two lines 2 Character The first two characters appear 4 Character The first four characters appear Settings for the Flexi Pad Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Operation menu press Flexi Pad Mode The Flexi Pad Mode menu appears The status area shows a list of the items with their settings 2 Make the following settings as required Coupling the transition type selection with the Flexi Pad control block mode selection To make the Flexi Pad mode selection change automatically when WIPE or DME is selected in the transition control block press Wipe DME Auto Deleg turning it on Button indications in the memory recall section When the Flexi Pad control block mode is WIPE or DME for the button indications in the memory recall section select Pattern or Register Name in the lt Wipe DME Display gt group When the mode is Snapshot or Effect select Register No or Register Name i
101. to 16 00 to 16 00 offset wave phase and amount of movement 4 Speed HP Horizontal direction and speed of 1 100 00 to 100 00 waves Slant Slant of waves 8 000 to 8 000 Amp V Amplitude of waves in vertical 0 00 to 100 00 direction 7 Freq V Frequency of waves in vertical 0 00 to 100 00 direction 8 Offset V 3 Vertical direction in which to offset 16 00 to 16 00 wave phase and amount of movement 9 Speed V Vertical direction and speed of 100 00 to 100 00 waves 10 Slant Slant of waves 8 000 to 8 000 a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off When Size is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values phase and amount of movement 1 Amp H Amplitude of waves 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq H Frequency of waves 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset H3 Direction in which to offset wave 16 00 to 16 00 4 Speed H 1 Direction and speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 5 Slant Slant of vvaves 8 00 to 8 00 a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off 40 1 DME Special Effect Operations Offset To stop the vvaves Press Lock turning it on VVith each press the vvaves alternately stop and start moving again To select the vvaveform Press Form and set the following parameters e When H amp V mode is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Form H Waveform in horizontal direction 4 t9 62 2
102. upper part of the list Using any of the following methods select the desired registers e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Use the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Register Register number 1 to 99 3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99 e To select all registers press All 5 Press Delete Attaching a name to an effect register Use the following procedure 1 In the Effect menu press VF2 Effect and HF7 Rename The Rename menu appears Register Operations in the Menus 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection window then select the region in the selection window Selecting multiple regions is also possible Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Using any of the follovving methods select the register you vvant to name e Press directly on the list in status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to select a register 1 Register Register number 1 to 99 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values The selected register appears in reverse video Press Rename A keyboard window appears For details of keyboard window operation see Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 Enter the name of not more than eight characters
103. 0 to 100 00 6 Top Border width on top side 4 50 to 4 50 7 Left Border width on left side 8 00 to 8 00 8 Right Border width on right side 8 00 to 8 00 9 Bottom Border vvidth on bottom side 4 50 to 4 50 10 Density Border density 0 00 to 100 00 suones do JWA 11 4a deyo 2 Press Crop turning it on The Crop effect is enabled You can adjust degree of cropping with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Parameter limits vary as shown below depending on the aspect ratio 4 3 suones do JWA 0840 26 or 16 9 selected in the system e 4 3 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 H Crop positions on left and right 1 Left value shovvn sides 2 V Crop positions on top and Top value shown bottom sides 3 All Crop positions on all sides Left value shown 6 Top Crop position on top side 3 00 to 3 00 7 Left Crop position on left side 4 00 to 4 00 8 Right Crop position on right side 4 00 to 4 00 9 Bottom Crop position on bottom side 3 00 to 3 00 e 16 9 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 H Crop positions on left and right 1 Left value shovvn sides 2 V Crop positions on top and Top value shown bottom sides 3 All Crop positions on all sides Left value shown 6 Top Crop position on top side 2 25 to 2 25 7 Left Crop position on left side 4 00 to 4 00 8 Right Crop position on right side 4 00 to 4 00 9 Bottom Crop position on b
104. 00 to 6 00 7 Left Border width on left side 8 00 to 8 00 8 Right Border width on right side 8 00 to 8 00 9 Bottom Border width on bottom side 6 00 to 6 00 10 Density Border density 0 00 to 100 00 16 9 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Border width on left and right Left value shown sides 2 V Border width on top and bottom Top value shown sides 3 All Border width on all sides Left value shown 24 DME Special Effect Operations 4 To set the border color and density press Border Color turning it on and set the follovving parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 5 To soften the border edges press Border Soft turning it on and set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Soft Softness of inner side of border 1 0 00 to 100 00 Crop Settings This effect crops the image For an illustrative figure and other information see DME Special Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Cropping the image Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF1 The Border Crop menu appears DME Special Effect Operations 25 Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 5 Density Border density 0 0
105. 084 suones do AWG 4aldeyo To apply the Mosaic Glass effect Display the Mosaic Glass menu The items displayed in the Mosaic Glass menu and the functions of the knobs are the same as for the VVave menu For more information about hovv to make settings see VVave settings page 39 Flag settings Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind To appiy the Flag effect Display the Flag menu The items displayed in the Flag menu and the functions of the knobs are the same as for the VVave menu For more information about how to make settings see Wave settings page 39 Tvvist settings The Twist effect twists the image To apply the Twist effect With the Twist menu displayed set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Amp V Amplitude of twist in vertical direction 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq V Frequency of twist in vertical direction 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset V 3 Amount of movement in twist phase 1 16 00 to 16 00 in the vertical direction 4 Speed Speed and direction of twist 100 00 to 100 00 movement in vertical direction Slant Slant of twist 8 000 to 8 000 Amp H Amplitude of twist in horizontal 0 00 to 100 00 direction 8 Offset 2 Amount of movement in twist phase 1 100 00 to 100 00 in the horizontal direction 10 Slant Slant of twist 8 000 to 8 000 a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is of
106. 1 In the Switcher gt Output menu press V Blank Through The V Blank Through menu appears The status area shows the output ports and the assigned signals the vertical blanking interval and the through mode Enable Disable status 242 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 2 Press V Blank Mask 3 Adjust the parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Mask End Final value for vertical blanking See note a below interval a Depending on the signal format the adjustment range varies as follows 480i 10 to 19 e 576i 6 to 22 To return the values to their defaults press Default 4 To enable the through mode press Through Mode setting it to Enable The through mode can be applied to the following outputs e Aux 1 to 48 e Program outputs of the M E and PGM PST rows e Clean outputs of the M E and PGM PST rows Making safe title settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Output menu press Safe Title The Safe Title menu appears The status area shows the output ports and the assigned signals with the box 1 box 2 and cross states 2 To enable the safe title on off setting made in the Misc menu press Safe Title turning it on 3 Carry out either of the following operations To display a box Press Box1 or Box2 turning it on In this case carry out the following steps 4 and 5 To display a cross Press Cross turning it on 4 When you selecte
107. 3 Press the ENTER button This recalls the specified register When you recall an empty register This assigns the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block to macro editing For details of macro editing see Creating and Editing a Macro page 312 When you recall a register holding a macro This immediately executes the macro While the macro is executed the RCALL button flashes e t is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time e During macro execution recalling the same register again stops the macro being executed Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in setup If you change the settings in setup a saved macro may not have the expected effect e During macro execution if you switch the control panel to macro editing mode the macro being executed stops e During macro editing it is not possible to execute a macro Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 311 90 81 1 08 soley 81 131deyo e If you start execution of a macro by operating a Flexi Pad control block or a button for which a macro attachment is set then before the end of execution of that macro you cannot recall and execute a separate macro from the numeric keypad control block Creating and Editing a Macro Creating a new macro Use the following procedure 1 Recall an empty register For details of the method of operation see the
108. 31 N Nega settings 34 Netvvork settings 195 Nonlinear effects settings 37 o On air tally 228 Operation mode setting 235 settings 228 P Page Roll 339 Page turn 338 settings 58 Panorama settings 57 Parallel input settings 265 output settings 269 tally settings 286 Path setting 136 Path type for Curve 137 for Hue 138 for Xpt 138 Pause event 314 320 insertion 320 P BUS action setting 87 timeline creation editing 87 trigger 90 P BUS devices 86 control 87 control mode setting 226 PGM PST logical assignment to M E 238 menu 344 Picture in picture 338 340 Posterization 33 Preset color mix setting 245 Primary setting 204 Program button assignment 211 settings 210 R Random diamond dust wipes 335 Reference output setting 244 phase adjustment 235 Region 118 selection button assign ment 210 Register operations in the menus 150 recalling 115 Reset 201 Ripple settings 45 Rotary wipes 332 Router interface settings 278 Run mode setting 141 S Safe title settings 243 Screen aspect ratio 198 saver 233 Separate sides settings 74 Sepia settings 32 Serial port settings 273 tally setting 288 Setup for DCU 265 for DME 260 for operations from the control panel 205 for router interface tally 278 for svvitcher unit 235 for the whole switcher sys tem 195 Shadow settings 84 Shotbox execution from the numeric keypad control block 186 in the Flexi Pad control block 187 in the utility shotbox
109. 4 2 Select the device interface you want to set for the REMOTE3 port from the lt Remote3 gt group Editor A assign Editor A to the REMOTE3 port Editor B assign Editor B to the REMOTES3 port AUX assign AUX to the REMOTE3 port assign 1 to REMOTH3 port ga REMOTE3 and REMOTE4 are respectively assigned to DME1 and DME2 you can switch the AUX bus from the DME DME 3000 7000 connected to these ports At this time connect the DME input video signals and key signals as follows e DME video input AUX1 output e DME key input AUX2 output e DME video input AUX4 output e DME2 key input AUX5 output Note that for a DME external video signal you can select any of AUX1 to AUX14 on the DME Connect to the selected AUX bus Making switcher processor GPI input settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Device Interface menu press GPI Input The GPI Input menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Port Port selection 1108 2 No Selection of number for action to be 1108 assigned 3 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger type Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Apply the
110. 451 HF2 Pattern Mix 1452 HF3 Sub Pattern 1453 HF5 Main Modify 1455 M HF6 Sub Modify 1456 M HF1 1ch 1461 HF2 2ch 1462 HF4 Edge Direction 1464 HF5 Modify 1465 HF1 Transition 1471 HF2 Video Process 1472 HF3 Key Priority 1473 HF4 Next Key Priority 1474 Tr HF4 Edge Direction 1454 Matte Adjust 1454 1 HF5 Processed Key 1415 Monitor 1415 1 HF6 Transition 1416 Wipe Adust 1416 1 Pattern Select 1416 2 DME Wipe Adjust 1416 3 1ch Pattern Select 1416 4 HF7 Video Process 1417 soled The functions in the DSK 2 to DSK 4 menus are the same as those in the DSK 1 menu with the following menu page numbers DSK 2 menu 142x DSK 3 menu 143x DSK 4 menu 144x Mix Pattern Select 1454 2 ulti Adjust 1455 1 ulti Adjust 1456 1 Frame Memory Menu IFRAME MEM button Frame Memory VF1 Recall VF2 Edit VF3 Reposition Lock VF4 File al m HFT 2 HFT 2 HF1 HF2 HF1 HF2 HF3 4 Recall Thumbnail 2111 Recall List 2112 Freeze 2121 nput Adiust 2122 1 Composite 2122 ees Adjust 2122 2 Pattern Select 2122 3 Reposition 2131 Lock 2132 Delete Thumbnail 2141 Delete List 2142 Rename Thumbnail 2143 Rename List 2144 Color Bkgd Menu COLOR BKGD button Color Bkgd VF1 Color Bkgd1 2210 VF2 Color Bkgd2 2220 Mix Pattern
111. 6 buttons in the function button area select the category for which you want to make the setting First row path settings for the switcher M E to M E3 and PGM PST banks Second and third rows path settings for User1 to User8 Fourth row path settings for DME local channel and global channel 3D transforms and effects To carry out path operations relating to DME requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set Making switcher path settings Path Setting This section describes settings for M E 1 Keyl as an example The area for the VF buttons shows the names of items A b sign by a button indicates that pressing it opens a more detailed setting menu The status area shows the settings for Xpt Hue and Curve However depending on the item these parameters may or may not be present Whenever you set a path or modify its setting be sure to press the MOD button in the keyframe control block The setting does not become effective unless the MOD button is pressed Page Key Frame Free KF 0 6113 1 gt Path 1 KF 0 0 00 00 00 00 A Spline Curve Tens Key2 Key3 Key4 Bkgd Util 2 Wipe DME Wipe Trans Time Line Changing the path type for Curve Use the follovving procedure 1 In the Path menu press M E 1 The M E 1 menu appears 2 Press the Curve path type indication for the Keyl item that you want to change A path selection window appears 3 Press the indication for the desired path ty
112. Adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Brightness 1 Menu screen brightness 11052 a The larger the value the brighter the screen Adiusting the alarms In the Panel gt Maintenance menu make the following settings To give audible feedback from menu touch screen operations Press Touch Beep turning it on Calibrating the touch panel Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Maintenance menu press Touch Panel Calibration Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dm s 9 06 234 The follovving message appears To Perform Calibration please touch the center of each plus sign 2 Press OK 3 Press the center of the plus sign displayed on the screen When you press on the plus sign it disappears and a diagonally opposite plus sign appears 4 Press the center of the plus sign A confirmation message appears e Select Yes to restart the panel reflecting the new setting e Select No to cancel the setting and return to the Maintenance menu Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel Setup Relating to Svvitcher Processor Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu To make settings for the switcher processor configuration use the Switcher gt Config menu To display the Config menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF3
113. Bus Link 7321 3 Link Matrix Adjust 7321 4 Link Table Adjust 7321 5 Link Bus Adjust 7321 6 10 Key Region Assign 7321 7 Program Button 7321 8 Transition Module 7321 9 HF2 Xpt Assign 7322 Source Select 7322 1 E Xpt Assign 7322 2 Sub Table Assign 7322 3 Name Export 7322 5 HF3 Aux Assign 7323 Source Select 7322 4 HF4 Pref Utiliiy 7324 Utility Module Assign 7324 1 HF5 Device Interface 7325 GPI Input 7325 1 HIL Set 7325 2 GPI Output 7325 3 DCU Serial Port Assign 7325 4 HF6 Operation 7326 Region Priority 7326 1 Effect Mode 7326 2 Flexi Pad Mode 7326 3 Custom Button 7326 4 Sensitivity 7326 5 HF7 Maintenance 7327 Menu Tree ENG SETUP button Setup VF1 man o previous page VF2 Panel p VF3 Switcher 1 Config 7331 M E Output Assign 7331 1 VF4 DME PGM Config 7331 2 VF5 DCU K PVW Config 7331 3 User 1 8 Config 7331 4 Logical M E Assign 7331 5 HF2 Input 7332 Video Process 7332 1 HF3 Output 7333 Output Assign 7333 1 Video Clip 7333 2 V Blank Through 7333 3 Safe Titile 7333 4 4 3 Crop 7333 5 HF4 Transition 7334 Preset Color Mix 7334 1 Transition Curve 7334 2 HF5 Key Wipe FM n Key 7335 1 DSK Auto Drop 7335 2 HF6 Link 7336 nternal Bus Link to next page GPI Input 7337 2 GPI Output 7337 4 Aux Control 7337 5 HF4 Device Interface 7344 4 DME1 GPI Output 7344 3 2
114. Bus selection 1 to 112 7 In the lt Bus gt group select any of the following Enable Enable the GPI link setting for the selected bus Disable Disable the GPI link setting for the selected bus All Enable Enable the GPI link setting for all buses To set the delay value Use the following procedure 1 In the GPI Link Adjust menu turn the knobs to select the output port for which you want to set the delay value and the corresponding delay value Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 GPI Port GPI output port for the 1108 setting 5 Delay Delay value for the output 0 to 300 fields port 2 Press Delay Set This confirms the delay value which is reflected in the status area Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu To carry out setup relating to connections with external devices display the Switcher gt Device Interface menu To display the Device Interface menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF3 Switcher and HF7 Device Interface Making 9 pin port device interface settings The description in this section takes the REMOTE3 port as an example For other REMOTE ports carry out the same process as required 1 In the Switcher gt Device Interface menu press Remote Assign The Remote Assign menu appears Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 253 dm s Su ul5uzi 9 Jeldeyo dnjes 91 3010640 25
115. CUE button for VTR operation Inhibit Inhibit operations with these buttons 5 Select the assignment for the NORM NORM REV and REV buttons in the standard type transition control block from the lt NORM NORM REV REV Button Assign gt group Normal Reverse These are used as the NORM button NORM REV button and REV button Play Stop Cue These are used as the PLAY button STOP button and CUE button for VTR operation Inhibit Inhibit operations with these buttons Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu To carry out the cross point settings use the Panel gt Xpt Assign menu To display the Xpt Assign menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF2 Xpt Assign The status area shows button numbers of the cross point buttons and the assigned video key source names and source name display color Assigning signals to cross point buttons For each button number a pair consisting of a video signal and a key signal is assigned You can also assign the same signal to another button number at the same time When carrying out key operations on a bank if the key fill and key source selection mode is set to Auto Select the signals are selected according to this pair setting See Selecting Key Fill and Key Source in Chapter 4 Volume 1 To assign a video signal or key signal to cross point buttons proceed as follows 212 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel m the P
116. Circle menu displayed set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Radius Adjustment Size of circle Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 To make the axis of modulation vertical Press Mod V turning it on The axis of modulation when converting to the circle becomes vertical Panorama settings The Panorama effect curves the upper and lower edges of the image to emphasize the sense of perspective DME Special Effect Operations 57 suones do JWA LL13 deyo suones do AWG 0840 To appiy the Panorama effect With the Panorama menu displayed set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Curve H Horizontal curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 Curve V Vertical curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 3 Position H Horizontal curve center position 4 000 to 4 000 4 Position V Vertical curve center position 3 000 to 3 000 Page Turn settings The Page Turn effect tums the image like turning a page To appiy the Page Turn effect VVith the Page Turn menu displayed use the follovving procedure 1 m the Split Mode gt group select the split mode H amp V The image turns as it is split from the center into 4 parts left right upper lower H The image turns as it is split from the center into 2 parts left right V The image turns as it is split from the center into 2 parts upper lower When nothing is selected Off
117. EV5 Device6 DEV6 Device7 DEV 7 and Device8 DEVS Dev9 12 indicate assignment of Device9 DEV9 Device10 DEV 10 Device11 DEV11 and Device12 DEV12 Misc indicate assignment of P BUS PBUS and GPI GPT Creating and saving a master timeline To save a master timeline register with the menu use the following procedure 1 In the Store menu using either of the following methods select the register in which you want to save the master timeline e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to specify the register Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Master Reg Master timeline register 1 to 99 number Press Edit The Edit menu appears and you can now save the master timeline in the specified register In this menu again you can turn the knob to select the master timeline register The status area shows the status of each region in this master timeline Using any of the following methods select the region Multiple selections are also possible e Press directly on the display in the status area e To cancel the selection press once more to return to the normal display Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 4 Turn the knob to select the number of the effect register Knob Parameter 2 Reg No Adiustment Setting values Effe
118. Form V Waveform in vertical direction 1063 e VVhen Size mode is selected Knob Parameter Adiustment 1 Form H VVaveform Setting values 10 63 a 1 SINE Sine vvave 2 PARABOLA Parabola wave 3 TRIANGLE Triangular wave 4 RECTANGLE Rectangular wave 5 CIRCLE Circular wave 6 CUBIC Cubic wave To randomize the modulated waveform Use the following procedure 1 Press Random turning it on 2 Set the following parameters e When H amp V mode is selected DME Special Effect Operations 41 suones do AWG 11 s deu suones do JWA 0840 Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values vertical and horizontal directions 1 Random H Degree of randomness in 0 00 to 100 00 horizontal waveform modulation 2 Random V 1 Degree of randomness in vertical 1 0 00 to 100 00 waveform modulation 3 Random All Degree of randomness in both Random H value shown e When Size mode is selected Knob Parameter 1 Random H Adjustment Degree of randomness in waveform modulation Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 To limit the wave range Use the following procedure 1 Press Range turning it on 2 Set the following parameters e When H amp V mode is selected Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values modulation range 1 Size H Amount of horizontal wave 0 00 to 100 00 modulation 2 Offset H Center point of horizontal
119. GPI Input 7344 4 H L Set 7344 5 2 GPI Output 7344 6 ink Bus Select 7336 2 Link Table Select GPI Link 7336 4 GPI Link Adjust 7336 5 HE7 Device Interface 7337 Remote Assign 7337 1 H L Set 7337 3 HF1 Input 7341 1 GPI Input 7344 1 HIL Set 7344 2 x pu ddy x pu ddy 356 Menu Tree ENG SETUP button Engineering Setup l VF1 System VF2 Panel to previous pages VF3 Switcher VF4 DME VF5 DCU HF1 Input Config 7351 VF6 Router Tally HF2 GPI Input Assign 7352 H L Set 7352 1 HF3 Output Config 7353 HF4 GPI Output Assign 7354 HF5 Serial Port Assign 7355H P Bus Setting 7355 1 VTR Setting 7355 2 DDR 509 Setting 7355 3 HF1 Router 7361 External Box Assign 7361 1 HF2 Group Tally 7362 HF3 Wiring 7363 New 7363 1 odify 7363 2 HF4 Tally Enable 7364 New 7364 1 f odify 7364 2 HF5 Tally Copy 7365 New 7365 1 odify 7365 2 HF6 Parallel Tally 7366 Set 7366 1 HF7 Serial Tally 7367 Source Assign 7367 1 Index A Action setting 87 for rewind 89 93 105 Alarm adjustment 233 Aux bus control enable disable 258 AUX bus remote panel 290 AUX delegation button settings 216 shift operation 218 AUX MON menu 346 B Background settings 73 transition flip flop mode 245 Banks and registers 316 Beveled edge settings 27 Blind se
120. HF2 Import Export The list on the left shows the frame memory registers and the list on the right shows the content of the external recording media s li sa deyo Importing Frame Memory Data As an example to import data in a bitmap format from a memory card to a frame memory register use the following procedure 1 In the Import Export menu press the device selection area on the left to select Frame Memory BMP 2 Press the device selection area on the right to select Memory Card It is not possible to select a directory 3 Using any of the following methods select the register into which the data is to be imported and the file e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List L Register selection 1 to 304 Importing and Exporting Files 4 Knob Parameter Adiustment Setting values 2 List R File selection 1 to Press Import This transfers the external file to the frame memory register Exporting Frame Memory Data As an example to save image data from frame memory in a different format on a memory card use the following procedure 1 2 In the Import Export menu press the device selection area on the left to select Frame Memory BMP Press the device selection area on the right t
121. Highlight area The three regions for which the light intensity can be set DME Special Effect Operations 65 suones do AWG 11 1 1080 suones do JWA 0840 Setting the bar shape of the highlight area When you select Bar or Preset in step 2 use the following procedure to set the shape of the bar 1 Turn Light Modify on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 X X value of bar center point 16 00 to 16 00 2 Y Y value of bar center point 9 00 to 9 00 3 Angle 3 Angle of bar 8 00 to 8 00 4 VVidth VVidth of bar 0 00 to 100 00 5 Soft Softness of edges 0 00 to 100 00 a There are some nonlinear effects for which Angle cannot be used L Center point of bar Bar angle vvidth Bar shape parameters Setting the color of the light in the highlight area To set the color of the light in the highlight area use the follovving procedure 1 Turn Light Color on 66 DME Special Effect Operations 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Setting the bar shape of the shade area When you select Preset in step 2 see page 65 of the procedure Ap
122. Hold gt group as follows Normal The lt Xpt Hold Mode gt in the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu is enabled Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 231 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 Protect In this mode pressing a panel button cannot change the cross point settings The button ON OFF state is preserved in each of the Normal and Protect modes For example if the XPT HOLD buttons are ON in the Normal mode and you switch to Protect mode then if the XPT HOLD buttons were OFF in this mode the previous time the XPT HOLD buttons go off and if they were ON they light Setting trackball joystick and double click sensitivity Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Operation menu press the Sensitivity The Sensitivity menu appears The status area shows a list of the items with their settings 2 Make the following settings as required Trackball and Z ring sensitivity in normal mode In the lt Trackball Normal Mode gt group select x1 x2 or x4 Trackball and Z ring sensitivity in fine mode In the lt Trackball Fine Mode gt group select eae il or el Joystick sensitivity in normal mode In the lt Joystick Normal Mode gt group select x1 x2 or x4 Joystick sensitivity in fine mode In the lt Joystick Fine Mode gt group select 11 21 1 4 or g Touch sensitivity for recalling menus by double clickin
123. IP addresses for each device excluding the DCU Making the network settings Use the following procedure 1 In the System gt Network Config menu press Auto Config This automatically checks all devices excluding the DCU connected to the Data LAN Setup for the Whole System 195 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 2 Once svvitch to another menu then display the Netvvork Config menu again Now the status area of the System gt Network Config menu shows the results of the automatic check Be sure to carry out this operation after reconfiguring the system or after a software upgrade System Settings System Config Menu To make the system settings use the System gt System Config menu To display the System Config menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF1 System and HF2 System Config After changing any of the following settings be sure to press Execute to save the new values If you want to cancel the setting changes without saving them press Clear Selecting the system operation mode In the lt Operation Mode gt group of the System gt System Config menu select one of the following Single Proc Control mode in which the panel controls a switcher and the DME connected to the switcher Dual Simul Control mode in which the panel controls two switchers and the DME connected to each switcher simultaneously Specifying the switcher controlled by the control p
124. MKS 8080 8082 in Simple Connection 290 Chapter 17 Files Operations on ndividual 294 Displaying the Individual Menus 294 Viewing Detailed File Information 294 Selecting Regions nnp 40 stich dai seine 296 Selecting a Device for 296 Saving Files oes Ae ieee ete esas 297 Recalling 298 Copying Piles 299 Renaming 300 Deleting 300 File Batch 302 Displaying the Batch Operation 6 2222 302 302 Batch Recalling Files daa 303 Batch Deleting Files senei oetoesan Eene E ee EAEE aart 303 Importing and Exporting 304 Displaying the Import Export 5 2222 304 Importing Frame Memory Data 304 Exporting Frame Memory Data 522 305 Directory 306 Displaying the Directory n 306 Creating a New
125. Mix degree 0 00 to 100 00 2 a See Global Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 For Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix1 Mix degree for mix of 0 00 to 100 00 2 channel 1 vvith result of Mix2 2 Mix2 Mix degree for channels 0 00 to 100 00 2 2and3 a See Global Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Mixing pairvvise the images of channels 1 and 2 and channels 3 and 4 Use the follovving procedure 1 2 In the Combiner menu press Combiner Mix turning it on Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter 1 Mix1 Adjustment Mix degree for channels Tand2 Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 5 a See Global Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Press Combiner2 Mix turning it on Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter 1 Mix2 Adjustment Mix degree for channels 2and3 Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 2 a See Global Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Automatically setting the priority of overlapping images To set the system so that the priority of overlapping images is automatically determined by their position on the z axis press Auto turning it on Global Effect Operations It is not possible to make images intersect If an image is rotated the priority is determined by the position on the z axis of the center of the image Brick Settings This effect crea
126. PI output is set Displayed Attributes set character codes Port number GPI output is set for the port of the displayed number Setting Key Snapshot Attributes Applying key snapshot attributes To apply an attribute to a key snapshot use the following procedure 1 In the Snapshot menu press VF5 Key Snapshot and HF1 Attribute The Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt Attribute menu appears The status area shows the region names register numbers and whether the registers are locked or not 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection window then select the region in the selection window Selecting multiple regions is also possible 3 Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list 4 Using either of the following methods select the register e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Snapshot Operations in the Menus 173 sjoysdeus p 8 s ousdeuS p s deu 174 e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Register Register number 1104 3 Num Select number of registers 1t04 e To select all registers press AlI 5 In the lt Recall Mode gt group select one of the following modes for save and recall operations XPT Only the key material selection data is saved or recalled Modifier
127. S 1 to PREFS 8 flash amber 2 Using any of the following methods display the menu to which you want to make a shortcut e In the menu control block press the relevant top menu selection button then select VF and HF e Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu screen then enter a menu number from the numeric keypad window e Press a particular control panel button twice in rapid succession Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 219 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 3 Press the user preference button to which you want to assign the shortcut The menu screen goes back to the Prefs Utility menu and the selection is reflected in the status area The user preference buttons PREFS 1 to PREFS 8 stop flashing amber To abandon the process of menu shortcut assignment In the Prefs Utility menu press Menu Shortcut once more This exits the menu shortcut assignment mode Assigning a function to a memory recall button in the utility shotbox control block Use the following procedure 1 In the Prefs Utility menu press Utility Module Assign The Prefs Utility gt Utility Module Assign menu appears The status area shows the settings in the utility shotbox control block 2 Using any of the following methods select the button to be assigned e Press directly on the list e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs
128. SONY DVS 9000 90005F System With CCP 8000 Series Center Control Panel User s Guide Production Svvitcher System Volume 2 1st Edition Revised 1 Softvvare Version 2 00 and Later NOTICE TO USERS 2002 Sony Corporation All rights reserved This manual or the software described herein in whole or in part may not be reproduced translated or reduced to any machine readable form vvithout prior vvritten approval from Sony Corporation SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreement Table of Contents Chapter 11 DME Operations Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 13 Basic Opera Ons s sasa sad d n s l n 13 T
129. Select 2210 1 Mix Pattern Select 2220 1 Menu Tree 345 x pu ddy x pu ddy 346 AUX MON Menu AUX MON button VF1 Aux Bus 2311 Copy Swap Menu COPY SWAP button VF1 Copy Swap HF 1 M E 3111 HF2 Key 3112 HF3 Wipe 3113 HF4 DME Wipe 3114 HF5 Matte 3115 HF6 Color 3116 HF7 DME 3117 MISC Menu MISC button VF2 Safe Title 3221 Menu Tree DME Menu DME ve DME button DME VF1 Edge VF2 Video Modify VF3 Freeze VF4 Non Linear ani VF5 Light Trail VF6 Input Output HF 1 HF2 Beveled Edge 4112 HF 1 HF2 Multi Move 4122 HF3 Color Modify 4123 HF4 Mosaic 4124 HF 1 HF 1 Type 4141 HF1 HF2 Trail 4152 HF3 Motion Decay 4153 HF4 KF Strobe 4154 HF1 2 Video Key 4162 HF3 Process 4163 22 4111 Defocus Blur 4121 Freeze 4131 Lighting 4151 Bkgd 4161 F4 Graphic 4164 VVave 4141 1 Mosaic Glass 4141 2 Flag 4141 3 Twist 4141 4 Ripple 4141 5 Rings 4141 7 Broken Glass 4141 8 Flying Bars 4141 9 Blind 4141 10 Split 4141 11 Split Slide 4141 12 Mirror 4141 13 Multi Mirror 4141 14 Kaleidoscope 4141 15 Lens 4141 16 Circle 4141 17 Panorama 4141 18 Page Turn 4141 19 Roll 4141 20 Cylinder 4141 21 Sphere 4141 22 Explosion 4141 25 Swirl 4141 26 Melt 4141 27 Character Trail 4141 28 347
130. Setup menu select VF5 DCU and HF1 Input Config The status area shows input port information Assigning a GPI input port Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt Input Config menu select what the setting applies to DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group 2 In the lt Parallel Input Assign gt group press GPI Input 3 Using any of the following methods assign the number of the GPI input to the input port e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Setup Relating to DCU 265 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 sa deyD Knob Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Parallel Input Input port 1 to 102 3 GPI Input GPI input 1 to 50 4 To confirm the assignment in step 3 press GPI Input Set This assigns the GPI input and this is reflected in the status area Releasing the assignment of a GPI input port Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt Input Config menu select what the setting applies to DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group 2 In the lt Parallel Input Assign gt group if GPI Input is on press it to turn it off 3 Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 From No First port number 1 to To No 2 To No Last port number From No to 102
131. The Shadovv menu appears Depending on the selected channels the valid channel block buttons differ in the Chls lt Ch2 gt and lt Ch3 gt blocks The explanation of this procedure uses the example of lt Ch1 gt block Press Ch1 Shadow turning it on The drop shadow effect is enabled and channel 2 becomes the channel for the shadow to the image You can adjust the position and density of the shadovv vvith the knobs Set the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal shadovv position 8 00 to 8 00 2 Position V Vertical shadovv position 8 00 to 8 00 3 Density Density of shadovv 0 00 to 100 00 m the 1 Shadow Source gt group select the shadow source signal Video Select Ch2 video input as the shadovv Flat Color Select a matte color as the shadow 5 When you select Flat Color in step 4 adjust the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Global Effect Operations Chapter 12 External Devices Control of External Devices 86 Control o P BUS Devicesirr 0 87 Creating and Editing the P BUS Timeline 000 2222 87 BAB WIS Mt Oo Chae ere 0000000000 90 Gontroliofi GPI DEVICES 91 GPI Timeline Creation 4
132. The selected setting appears in the status area Making editor port settings In the 1 Editor Port Setting gt group of the DME gt Device Interface menu press either of the following to select the way in which the editor ports are used Setup Relating to DME 263 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 4 ldeuo 264 Common Control all of channels 1 to 4 through Editor port 1 Independ Control channels 1 to 4 individually through Editor ports 1 to 4 Setup Relating to DME Setup Relating to DCU For setup relating to DCU it is necessary to make the same settings on multiple control panels maximum three units that are sharing the DCU After carrying out the DCU setup on one control panel make the same settings on the other control panels Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs Input Config Menu The DCU parallel input ports are assigned with the following priority sequence 1 When external boxes are set in the Router Tally gt Router gt External Box Assign menu the parallel inputs are assigned to the external box inputs in order 2 When tally settings are carried out in the Router Tally gt Tally Enable menu tally inputs are assigned automatically In this menu you set only the input ports which are unused after making the above assignments To assign GPI inputs to DCU parallel input ports display the DCU gt Input Config menu To display the Input Config menu In the Engineering
133. There are no splits and the image turns from the edge 2 Press Page Turn then set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Radius Radius of turn part 0 00 to 100 00 2 Offset Amount of turn 100 00 to 100 00 3 Angle Angle of turn 0 250 to 0 000 0 500 to 0 000 a 0 250 to 0 250 0 c 8 000 to 8 000 9 a When split mode is H amp V b When split mode is H c When split mode is V d When split mode is Off To set the input signal of the back page 1 In the lt Back Video gt group select the signal input into the back page Self Use the same signal as the front page Flat Use a flat color Hue Rotation Gradually vary the hue DME Special Effect Operations 2nd Ch Use the 2nd channel video signal To select 2nd Ch it is first necessary to select the second DME on the keyer using DME 2 Adjust the following parameters according to the selected input signal When Flat is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance 1 Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 When Hue Rotation is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance 1 Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 Speed Speed at which hue changes 12 00 to 12 00 Roll settings The Roll effect rolls the image up To appl
134. Time Settings in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Modification Modifying keyframes Use the following procedure in the keyframe control block 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the desired edit point When the edit point is on a keyframe this is what you modify If the edit point is between two keyframes the previous keyframe is what you modify In constant duration mode see Effect Editing in Chapter I Volume 1 modification is only possible when the edit point is on a keyframe Creating and Editing Keyframes 121 spay 08 910 2 g 4010640 122 3 Using image transformations or adding special effects modify the keyframe 4 Press the MOD button This modifies the keyframe Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously You can modify a number of keyframes simultaneously There are three different cases for this operation e Modifying from the edit point to a particular keyframe e Modifying all keyframes in the effect e Modifying the keyframes in a specified range The different procedures for these cases are now described To modify from the edit point to a particular keyframe Use the following procedure 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the first keyframe of the range to be modified 3 Carry out the necessary modifications 4 Press the FROM TO button turning
135. Trans Key SS Recall Key2 SS Recall Key3 SS Recall Key4 SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind No Action Setup Relating to Switcher Processor dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 258 VVhen Source is P P Cut Auto Trans DSK1I Cut DSK1 Auto Trans DSK2 Cut DSK2 Auto Trans DSK3 Cut DSK3 Auto Trans DSK4 Cut DSK4 Auto Trans FTB Cut FTB Auto Trans DSKI SS Recall DSK2 SS Recall DSK3 SS Recall DSK4 SS Recal Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind No Action When Source is Common No Action Action list when the trigger type is Status When Source is 1 M E 2 or M E 3 Keyl On Key2 On Key3 On Key4 On No Action When Source is P P DSK1 On DSK2 On DSK3 On DSK4 On No Action When Source is Common Error Make Error Break No Action b When knob 2 selection is Key Snapshot c When knob 2 selection is Snapshot or Effect f Press Action Set to confirm the action selection The selected setting appears in the status area Test firing the trigger To test fire the trigger press Test Fire This outputs a trigger from the selected output port This is not output when the trigger type is Status Enabling or disabling Aux bus control Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Device Interface menu press Aux Control The Aux Control menu appears 2 Select th
136. Vhen the register is vvrite protected an L for lock appears Empty status VVhen the register is empty an E for empty appears Attribute settings The attributes set for a register are shovvn by the follovving character codes When the cross point hold is set Displayed Attributes set character codes A B Cross point hold is set for the A or B background bus 1 2 3 4 Cross point hold is set for key bus 1 2 3 or 4 3 U1 U2 Cross point hold is set for the utility 1 or utility 2 bus Fv Cross point hold is set for the DME front video bus Fk Cross point hold is set for the DME front key bus Bv Cross point hold is set for the DME back video bus Bk Cross point hold is set for the DME back key bus Aux Cross point hold is set for one of the AUX buses Mon Cross point hold is set for one of the monitor buses Fm1 Fm2 Cross point hold is set for one of the frame memory 1 and 2 buses RTR Cross point hold is set for the Router region a When Key Disable is selected for XPT Hold mode in setup Key disable is set Snapshot Operations in the Menus VVhen an effect dissolve is set Displayed Attributes set character codes Duration value The effect dissolve attribute is set vvith the displayed duration VVhen an auto transition is set Displayed Attributes set character codes T Auto transition is set When a G
137. a predetermined button is pressed the action command assigned to that button is output to control an external device Timeline The external device is controlled as a keyframe effect controlled by the center control panel Making DCU serial port settings You can assign buttons in the device control block DEV1 to DEV12 to DCU serial ports to operate the devices disk recorder VTR connected to these ports For a disk recorder you can also set the sharing of file lists 226 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel For details of DCU serial port settings see Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign Menu page 273 To associate a serial port vvith a device selection button 1 4 m the Panel gt Device Interface menu press DCU Serial Port Assign The Serial Port Assign menu appears Using any of the following methods select the DCU serial port e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Serial port selection 1 to maximum 2 a The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings The DCU number slot number and serial port number appear Select the device selection button to be assigned from the lt Assign gt group It is not possible to assign more than one device selection button to the same port The
138. adial mode is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp R Ripple amplitude along radius 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq R Ripple frequency along radius 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset R 3 Direction along radius in which 8 000 to 8 000 to offset ripple phase and amount of movement 4 Speed R 1 Ripple direction along radius 100 00 to 100 00 and speed 5 Amp A Ripple amplitude along 0 00 to 100 00 periphery a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off e When Angular mode is selected Adjustment Ripple amplitude along periphery Ripple frequency along periphery Direction along periphery in which to offset ripple phase and amount of movement Ripple direction along periphery and speed Knob Parameter 1 Amp A 2 Freq A 3 Offset A 2 4 Speed A 5 5 Amp R Ripple amplitude along radius a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off e When Both mode is selected Knob 1 Parameter 1 Amp R Adiustment Ripple amplitude along radius Freq R Ripple frequency along radius Offset R Direction along radius in which to offset ripple phase and amount of movement 4 Speed R Ripple direction along radius and speed Amp A Ripple amplitude along periphery Freq A Ripple frequency along periphery DME Special Effect Operations Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 8 000 to 8 000
139. al border position 6 000 to 6 000 Multi Mirror settings The Multi Mirror effect divides the image into originals and reflections lining them up vertically and horizontally To apply the Multi Mirror effect With the Multi Mirror menu displayed set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Interval H Horizontal distance between 0 000 to 10 000 mirrors original width 2 Offset H Amount of horizontal offset of 4 000 to 4 000 image with mirrors fixed 3 Interval V Vertical distance between mirrors 0 000 to 10 000 original width DME Special Effect Operations Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 4 Offset V Amount of vertical offset of image 4 000 to 4 000 with mirrors fixed 5 Angle Mirror angle 8 000 to 8 000 To set the center position of original image Use the following procedure 1 Press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values position 1 H Horizontal original image center 4 000 to 4 000 position 2 V Vertical original image center 4 000 to 4 000 Kaleidoscope settings The Kaleidoscope effect creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope To apply the Kaleidoscope effect With the Kaleidoscope menu displayed set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment
140. al is shown by a blue line Pause point A P appears where a pause is set Total timeline length The total time of delays and effect duration appears in white Effect duration The total duration of the effect appears in orange Knob adjustment display Turning the corresponding knob scrolls the timeline display allowing you to see the timeline for regions that were previously hidden Displaying the Timeline Menu 113 spay 8 910 2 g 101064 114 Selecting the region displayed In the Timeline menu there is a timeline display for each region but you can also restrict the display to certain regions Use the follovving procedure 1 m the Key Frame menu press HF5 Misc The Key Frame gt Misc menu appears 2 In the lt Timeline Display gt group select one of the following All Region display the timeline for all regions Active Region display the timeline only for regions selected with region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block Displaying the Timeline Menu Recalling a Register Use the numeric keypad control block to recall a register For each region there are 99 registers dedicated to keyframes numbered from 1 to 99 When creating an effect as a user programmable DME use a 3 digit register number which is commonly used for all DME regions channels For a description of the concept of re
141. an also select whether or not to transfer the tally information over the S Bus To select the tally groups use the Router Tally gt Group Tally menu To display the Group Tally menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF2 Group Tally Setting the tally groups Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Tally Group gt group of the Group Tally menu select the tally groups Group to 4 Use groups 1 to 4 Group5 to 8 Use groups 5 to 8 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 2 Press SBus Tally Enable turning it on or off On Enable the transfer of S Bus tally information over the S Bus Off Disable the transfer of S Bus tally information over the S Bus Wiring Settings Wiring Menu When configuring a system in which the switcher inputs and outputs are connected to a router it is necessary to set this connection configuration referred to as vviring in the S Bus space To make the wiring settings use the Router Tally gt Wiring menu The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies To display the Wiring menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF3 Wiring The status area shows the wiring settings Making new wiring settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Router Tally gt Wiring menu press New The New menu appears 2 With a knob or menu operation set the destination When switcher inputs and outputs ar
142. and link destination buses and link table information 2 Using any of the following methods select what setting applies to e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Link No Link number 1 to 64 Setup Relating to Svvitcher Processor 249 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 3 Press Link Bus Select The Link Bus Select menu appears The status area lists the current setting status of the selected link and the buses that can be selected 4 In the lt Bus Select gt group select Master Bus link source bus 5 Using any of the following methods select the bus to be the link source and press Bus Set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 No Bus selection 1 to 1183 a Only when Master Bus is selected 115 M E 1 Trans PGM 116 M E 2 Trans PGM 117 M E 3 Trans PGM and 118 P P Trans PGM are available When Linked Bus is selected 115 to 118 are not available With one of 113 to 116 selected for Master Bus linking is carried out as soon as you start moving the fader lever 6 In the lt Bus Select gt group selec
143. anel Use the following procedure 1 In the System gt System Config menu press the Panel Assign button The Panel Assign menu appears 196 Setup for the Whole System 2 Select the svvitcher to be controlled by the selected control panel as follovvs If there is only one switcher on the network in the lt 1st Switcher gt group set SVVR11 to ON and in the lt 2nd Switcher gt group set SWR2 to OFF If there are two switchers on the same network in the lt 1st Switcher gt group select the switcher to be operated When the system operation mode see previous item is set to Dual Simul the switcher status set in lt 1st Switcher gt appears on the control panel To set the selected control panel as tally control master panel press Tally Master turning it on If there are multiple panels and processors the control panel for which Tally Master is set to ON carries out tally control for the whole system When there are multiple control panels make sure that one of them has Tally Master set to ON When you change the master panel be sure to copy and save the setup tally TLY and router RTR data in the File menu and make the same settings for other panels Specifying the DME connected to the switcher Use the following procedure 1 2 In the System gt System Config menu press Switcher Assign The Switcher Assign menu appears Using either of the following methods select the switcher to wh
144. anel gt Xpt Assign menu press Source Select The Source Select menu appears The upper part of the status area shows the currently selected button number together with the currently assigned video and key signal names The lower part shows a list of the signals which can be assigned Turn the knob to select the button to which the assignment relates 1 Button No Cross point button selection 1 to 128 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values When assigning a video signal press Video in the lt Xpt gt group When assigning a key signal press Key Use any of the following operations to assign the signal e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to move the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting 3 Source No Selection of source to be assigned 1 to 128 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values To inhibit operation of certain button numbers In the Panel gt Xpt Assign menu select the button number you want to inhibit then press the Inhibit button Setting the source signal name and source name display color Use the following procedure 1 2 In the Panel gt Xpt Assign menu press Source Select The Source Select menu appears Turn the knob to select the signal to be set Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Source No Source signal selection 1 to 128 To set the source name p
145. appears 2 Random Degree to which pixel positions 0 00 to 100 00 DME Special Effect Operations 63 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp Amplitude of waves 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq Frequency of waves 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset 2 Amount of wave phase offset 16 000 to 16 000 4 Speed Direction and speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 5 Slant Slant of border 100 00 to 100 00 suones do WA 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 64 Character Trail settings The Character Trail effect extends the edge of the image like a trail To apply the Character Trail effect With the Character Trail menu displayed set the following parameters Knob _ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Position where effect starts 8 000 to 8 000 2 Expand Degree of expansion 0 00 to 100 00 3 Trans Angle Angle of slanting in effect region 8 000 to 8 000 4 Trail Angle Direction of trail 100 00 to 100 00 To make the tip of the swirl stardust Use the following procedure 1 Press Pixel turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Density Degree to which image disappears 0 00 to 100 00 2 Random Trail type and amount of stardust 0 00 to 100 00 Lighting Settings This effect provides the effect of light striking the image The following lighting patterns are available e Plane
146. apply temporary attributes to the master timeline 5 Press the ENTER button This recalls the specified register When the master timeline is recalled the region selection buttons light according to the saved region information To undo the recall of a register Immediately after recalling the register press the UNDO button to undo the operation After recalling the master timeline you cannot undo the recall Recalling a Register 117 spay 8 910 2 g Je deyo 118 Specifying the Region and Edit Points Selecting the region in vvhich editing applies Select the region in which the editing is applied by the effect consisting of keyframes using the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block See step 2 page 116 in Recalling a register Setting the edit points EDIT ENBL button CONST DUR button STOP EFF NEXT KF E F TURN KF DUR D OVER Loor coNsr auto INS DELAY DUR COPY PASTE SHIFT INS Buttons used for editing Keyframe control block To set the edit points use any of the following operations in the keyframe control block e To move the edit point to the keyframe immediately after the current time the position at which the effect is currently stopp
147. ation level 1 to 8 When setting the tally type set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Type Tally type 1 to 84 a When you selected Group to 4 in the section Setting the tally groups page 280 this is 1 R1 2 G1 3 R2 4 G2 5 R3 6 G3 7 R4 and 8 G4 When you selected Group5 to 8 this is 1 R5 2 G5 3 R6 4 G6 5 R7 6 G7 7 R8 and 8 G8 R is an abbreviation of Red Tally and G of Green Tally Press Execute This makes the parallel tally settings in accordance with the settings in steps 1 to 6 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 287 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 Deleting parallel tally settings Use the follovving procedure 1 m the Router Tally gt Parallel Tally menu using any of the following methods select the parallel tally whose settings you want to delete e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Slot No Parallel tally slot number 2to6 2 Port No Parallel tally port number 1 to 54 2 Press Clear This deletes the selected parallel tally entry Serial Tally Settings Serial Tally Menu To make serial tally settings display the Router Tally gt Serial Tally menu To display th
148. ations of the operating procedures for individual special effects begin with selections from the DME menu The following are common operations that you must do prior to selecting from the DME menu 1 In the device control block select the target DME channel 2 In the menu control block select the top menu selection button DME The DME menu appears suones do WA 11 s deu Border Settings This effect adds a border to the image For an illustrative figure and other information see DME Special Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 DME Special Effect Operations suones do JWA 0840 Adding a border Use the follovving procedure 1 m the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF1 Border Crop The Border Crop menu appears 2 Press Border turning it on The Border effect is enabled You can adfust the border vvidth parameters vvith the knobs Once the Border effect is enabled you cannot use the Edge Soft effect see page 26 3 Set the parameters Parameter limits vary as shown below depending on the aspect ratio 4 3 or 16 9 selected in the system 4 3 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 H Border vvidth on left and right Left value shovvn sides 2 V Border width on top and bottom Top value shown sides 3 All Border width on all sides Left value shown 5 Density Border density 0 00 to 100 00 6 Top Border width on top side 6
149. box operations Shotbox Register Creation 181 xoqlous nn 51 0108 xoqlous n Si s ydeuo 182 Press the STORE button turning it on The SNAPSHOT button lights green If not lighted press the SNAPSHOT button to turn it on Only in SHOTBOX operation mode with the STORE button lit the SNAPSHOT button or EFF button lights green to indicate that a setting operation is in progress for the purpose of saving snapshot data or effect data in a shotbox register Press the region button for the snapshot you want to save turning it on Enter the desired shotbox register number with the numeric keypad buttons To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button The display shows the relevant register numbers When a register number is postfixed with an E the register is empty Press ENTER This saves the region you turned on in step 5 and the register number you recalled for that region as a snapshot setting in a shotbox register and the STORE button goes off At the same time the RCALL button lights In the numeric keypad control block press the EFF button turning it on Specify the register number of the keyframe effect you want to save ina shotbox register and then recall it for each region For details of the procedure for recalling a register see Recalling a register page 115 1 Oreferring to steps 3 to 5 carry out the
150. bus Key cross point hold IXPT HOLD button in the key bus 5 Key disable XPT HOLD button in the key bus gt Numeric keypad Effect dissolve EFF DISS button controlblock Auto transition CLR AUTO TRANS button a When Xpt Hold mode is selected in setup b When Key Disable mode is selected in setup For details of temporary attributes and available attributes see Snapshot Attributes in Chapter 1 Volume 1 e cross point hold and key disable settings are maintained until you next press the XPT HOLD button e Applying temporary attributes does not affect the contents of the register It is not possible to apply temporary attributes to a master snapshot 5 Press the ENTER button This recalls the specified snapshot and the reference region name and recalled register number appear in the display If you applied the effect dissolve or auto transition temporary attributes in step 4 the corresponding buttons go off When a master snapshot is recalled the region selection buttons light according to the saved region information To cancel a snapshot recall operation After saving a snapshot to cancel the recall press the UNDO button 162 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block It is not possible to cancel recalling a master snapshot Creating and saving a master snapshot with the numeric keypad control block To create and save a master snapshot with
151. ce address Press Init Link Table A confirmation message appears press Yes The source addresses are reassigned and this is reflected in the status area To change the link number and link table number In this menu too you can change the link number and link table number To do this turn the knobs as follows to make the setting then press Link Table Set Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Link No Link to which setting applies 1 to 64 3 Link Table No Link table selection 1108 Linking cross point buttons and GPI output ports To link cross point buttons or the CUT and AUTO TRANS buttons in the cross point control block and GPI output ports use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Link menu press GPI Link to display the Switcher gt Link gt GPI Link menu The status area shows the output ports and the link status and delay value information Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 251 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 2 Using any of the following methods select the GPI output port e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 GPI Port Parameter Adjustment GPI output port selection Setting values 1108 3 Press GPI Link Adjust The GPI Link Adjust menu appears The status area shovv
152. cedure 1 Press the EFF button in the numeric keypad control block turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations and the RCALL button lights Press the region selection button for the region for which you want to make the setting turning it on You can also select more than one button Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button 95 The display shovvs the register number A letter e or E after the number indicates the register status as follovvs e This register is empty in the selected region E This register is empty in all selectable regions Press the ENTER button This recalls the register you selected in step 3 Press the DEV button in the device control block turning it on Check that the MENU button is not lit If it is lit press to turn it off With the device selection buttons in the device control block select the VTR or disk recorder for which you want to make the setting You can also select more than one button The first button you press lights green as the reference region and the subsequent buttons light amber To set the start point play back on the VTR or disk recorder by control from the device control block Find the desired start point and at that point Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 97
153. cel in the lt RUN gt group Continue Continue the execution Cancel Cancel the execution and return to the state before starting the execution Interchanging the AUTO TRANS and CUT buttons To interchange the AUTO TRANS and CUT buttons in the transition control block press the Auto Trans Cut Swap button turning it on UTIL button operation mode To set the operation mode of the UTIL button in the cross point control block press either of the following in the lt Util Button gt group Hold Acts as a utility button while held down changing the assignment of the cross point button rows Lock For the key rows each time the button is pressed the cross point button assignment toggles between the utility assignment and the normal assignment The background A and B rows are fixedly assigned to the A and B rows even if the UTIL button is pressed For details see Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel in Chapter 2 Volume 1 Transition preview operation mode For the operation mode of the TRANS PVW button select Lock or Hold in the Trans Pvw gt group The setting as to whether to use the One time mode in which the transition preview terminates when the transition completes or to use button control is made on the switcher side see page 244 Operation mode of the XPT HOLD buttons in the key rows Set the operation mode of the XPT HOLD buttons in the key rows in the lt Key Bus Xpt
154. con trol block 189 Shotbox menu 352 Shotbox register creation in the numeric keypad con trol block 181 using the menus 183 Shotbox register editing 191 Show key function 247 Signal format setting 198 Signal input settings for DME 260 for switcher processor 239 Signal output settings 240 Simple connection 290 Slide 336 340 Snapshot banks registers 165 menu 351 register editing 175 saving recalling 159 166 status display 172 Snapshot operations from the numeric keypad control block 158 in the Flexi Pad control block 164 inthe menus 170 Index x pul 360 Software installation 202 Solarization 33 Source name 229 display color 213 Source signal name 213 Sphere settings 60 Split 336 fader setting 245 settings 52 slide settings 53 Squeeze 337 340 Standard wipes 330 Start up state 200 Sub table creation 214 Swapping 152 Svvirl settings 61 Svvitcher configuration 235 System maintenance 203 settings 196 T Tally copy settings 285 generation settings 283 group settings 280 Tape transport control 94 Three dimensional parameters display 17 entering 18 values 18 Three dimensional transfor mation 13 Through mode settings 242 Time settings 133 strobe effect 36 Timeline menu 112 main parts 112 recalling 112 Touch panel calibration 233 Trackball sensitivity 232 Trail settings 67 Transition mode 245 preview mode setting 244 Twist settings 44 Index U USB driv
155. cro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block During macro editing if you press a button for which a macro attachment is set the macro vvithin the register assigned to the button is incorporated into the macro being edited Hovvever the macro assigned to the button is not executed VVhile carrying out macro editing in the numeric keypad control block absolutely no macro operations are possible in the Flexi Pad control block Repeat step 2 to save the desired events in the macro The operations you carry out on the control panel are saved as a sequence of events in the macro In the numeric keypad control block press the MCRO button turning it red Press the STORE button This completes macro editing and the MCRO and STORE buttons in the numeric keypad control block light amber The keyframe control block returns to the state before macro editing began In the numeric keypad control block save the macro For details of the method of operation see Saving a Macro page 314 Amending a macro You can add events to a macro saved in a register Use the following procedure 1 Recall the register holding the macro you want to change and execute the macro up to the last event For details of the method of operation see Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro page 317 In the numeric keypad control block hold down the MCRO button and press the STORE button This assigns the
156. ct register number 1 to 99 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required to set all regions and register numbers to be saved on the master timeline 6 In the lt Store gt group press Store This saves the settings To return to the state before saving the master timeline content In the lt Store gt group press Undo Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 149 spay 8 910 2 g 4010640 150 Register Operations in the Menus Using the Effect menu you can carry out the follovving effect register operations e Attribute setting e Status display e Register editing To display the Effect menu Press the top menu selection button EFF in the menu control block Effect Attribute Settings Applying effect dissolve To apply the effect dissolve attribute to a keyframe effect use the following procedure 1 In the Effect menu press VF2 Effect and HF1 Attribute The Attribute menu appears The status area shovvs the region names register numbers and status and attribute settings Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection vvindovv select the region Selecting multiple regions is also possible Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Using either of the follovving methods select the register e Press directly on the list in the status area
157. d Box1 or Box2 in step 3 adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Box Size Box size 50 00 to 100 00 3 Luminance Display brightness 0 00 to 100 00 2 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 243 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo a Adjustable for Box2 5 When in step 3 you selected Box1 or Box2 in the 1 Adjust gt or 2 Adjust gt group select the aspect ratio 16 9 14 9 4 3 Setting the reference output To adjust the reference output phase with respect to the reference input adjust the following parameters in the Switcher gt Output menu Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Line Line phase 90 to 90 3 Time Time 32 00 to 96 00 dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 sa deyD 244 Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu For settings relating to video switching use the Switcher gt Transition menu To display the Transition menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF3 Switcher and HF4 Transition The status area shows the transition preview key transition bus toggle and split fader settings for each M E and P P bank Selecting the bank to which the settings apply In the Transition menu using any of the following methods select the bank to which the settings apply then make the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scr
158. downstream key control block As an example to assign key 4 of the M E 1 bank to key delegation button 1 of the downstream key control block 1 use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Config menu press the DSK Fader Assign The DSK Fader Assign menu appears 2 Directly press on the indications in the status area to select the downstream key control block for which you want to make the setting and select the key delegation Here press on the intersection of the 1st Module column and Keyl Assign row 3 In the lt M E Select gt group select the operating bank of the key you want to assign Here select M E 1 as an example 4 In the lt Key Link Select gt group select the key you want to assign Here select Key4 as an example 5 To disable the fader lever of the selected downstream key control block select Disable in the lt Fader Assign gt group To enable the fader lever select one of the following in the lt Fader Assign gt group determine the key to which the fader lever operation applies All Key selected with one of the key delegation buttons Keyl Key assigned to key delegation button 1 DSK1 button Key2 Key assigned to key delegation button 2 DSK2 button Key3 Key assigned to key delegation button 3 DSK3 button 4 Key assigned to key delegation button 4 DSK4 button 206 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel Linking svvitcher bus and routing svvitcher
159. e setup settings for the selected devices in non volatile memory within the respective devices For the control panel only the key bus delegation buttons are saved Reset and Initialization Initialize Menu To carry out a reset or memory initialization for a device use the System gt Initialize menu To display the Initialize menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF1 System and HF5 Initialize The status area shows the current start up mode settings Resetting the device and initializing memory Use the following procedure 1 2 In the status area of the System gt Initialize menu select the device to which the settings are to apply In the lt Initialize gt group select one of the following modes Reset Reset the device All Clear Initialize memory Press Execute A confirmation message appears Setup for the Whole System 201 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 202 4 Select Yes Depending on the selection in step 2 the follovving is the result e When you selected Reset a reset is applied to the device causing it to be restarted in the start up state e When you selected Clear all memory in the device is cleared including snapshots keyframe effects setup and so on and the device returns to its factory default settings However the Network Config Format Start Up and Date Time settings are not initialized Installa
160. e 9 pin port for the setting from the lt Control gt group Remotel Make the settings for the REMOTE port Remote2 Make the settings for the REMOTE port Remote3 Make the settings for the REMOTE3 port Remote4 Make the settings for the REMOTE4 port 3 Using any of the following methods select the Aux bus e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Aux bus selection 0 to 483 a 0 EDIT PVW 1 to 48 Aux to Aux48 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 4 Select whether to enable or disable Aux bus control from the Control Modes group Enable enable control of the port selected in step 2 Disable disable control of the port selected in step 2 Manual make whether control of the port selected in step 2 is possible or not depend on the setting in the Misc menu 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as required to make the settings for other ports Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 259 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 sa deyD 260 Setup Relating to DME Settings Relating to Signal Inputs Input Menu To make settings relating to DME input signals display the DME gt Input menu To display the Input menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF4 DME and HF Input The status area shows the initial crop i
161. e Effects Sequence of Keyframe Operations Displaying the Timeline Menu 2 Interpreting the Timeline 112 Recalling a Register scscccsscssscssscsceccsscssscscessccessesssscsssssscssessscsseesesees 115 Specifying the Region and Edit Pointts 118 Creating and Editing 16 2 120 120 121 121 DCC ON z s s AA 125 Movement e n s s s s B s 126 COPYING z a Sind esti 127 Pasen rai n L 128 Keyframe Loop Repeated Execution of a Specified Range 128 Undoing an Edit 522 131 Duration Mode 8 101 0 2 132 Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DMF 132 133 Setting the Keyframe 133 Setting the Effect 134 Setting the 135 4 Table of Conte
162. e Link Matrix Adjust menu appears Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 207 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 208 The status area shows the status of the currently selected matrix and a list of the source and destination start addresses that can be selected In this menu too you can use the knobs to select the link for the setting 2 Using any of the following methods define the position of the matrix to be linked e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Source Source start address 1 to 897 3 Destination 1 Destination start address 1 to 897 4 Level Level 1108 3 To confirm a source address selected in step 2 press Source Set to confirm a destination address press Destination Set and to confirm a level press Level Set This confirms the selection which is reflected in the status area To set a link table For the link selected in the External Bus Link menu make the settings as follows 1 In the Panel gt Config gt External Bus Link gt Link Matrix Adjust menu press Link Table Adjust The Link Table Adjust menu appears The status area lists the status of the currently selected link combinations of video signals and sources and the sources that can be selected 2 Using an
163. e Serial Tally menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF7 Serial Tally The serial tally settings appear in the status area Setting or changing the serial tally settings Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Serial Tally Port gt group of the Serial Tally menu select the port to which the setting applies 2 In the lt Tally Type gt group press the tally types to select You can select up to four The selectable tally types depend on the settings in the Group Tally menu Making the serial tally source address settings To set the serial tally source address for each port use the following procedure 288 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 1 m the Serial Tally menu press Source Assign The Source Assign menu appears In the status area the tally types and source address set for the serial tally port appear 2 In the lt Serial Tally Port gt group select the port to which the setting applies 3 Using any of the following methods select the port bit number e Press directly on the list on the left of the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Bit No Bit selection 1 to 128 4 Turn the knob to select the source address Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Source Addr Source address selection 1 to 1024
164. e connected to the router in a group you can specify the start and end destination addresses Destination From Specify the start destination address for the wiring configuration Destination To When the wiring configuration is multiple specify the end destination address For a single wiring connection this setting is not required Destination Level Specify the destination level of the wiring configuration Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Destination From Destination start address 1 to 1024 2 Destination To Destination end address From start address to 1024 3 Destination Level Destination level 1108 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 281 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 3 4 Set the source Source From Specify the source start address for the wiring configuration Source Level Specify the source level for the wiring configuration Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 4 Source From Source start address 1 to 1024 5 Source Level Source level 1to 8 Press Execute This makes the wiring setting according to the specifications in steps 2 and 3 Changing the wiring settings Use the following procedure 1 2 In the Router Tally gt Wiring menu press Modify The Modify menu appears Referring to steps 2 and 3 in the preceding section Making new wiring settings
165. e desired edit point When the edit point is on a keyframe this is what you delete If the edit point is between two keyframes the previous keyframe is what you delete To delete a number of keyframes in a single operation press the FROM TO button or the ALL button turning it on For how to specify a range of keyframes see Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously page 122 Press the DEL button This deletes the keyframe Deleting a keyframe reduces the total duration of the effect In constant duration mode see page 132 however the duration does not change For details of changes in the effect duration caused by deleting keyframes see Keyframes in Chapter I Volume 1 910 2 g 1 1064 126 Movement Moving keyframes Use the follovving procedure 1 2 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on Stop the effect at the edit point you want to move To move a number of keyframes in a single operation press the FROM TO button turning it on to specify the keyframes For how to specify a range of keyframes see Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously page 122 Press the DEL button This deletes the keyframe and saves it in the paste buffer Creating and Editing Keyframes Move the edit point to the position to which you want to move the keyframe Press the PASTE button This inserts the keyframe you have moved
166. e effect is executed in the direction from the first keyframe to the last keyframe When the REV button is lit The effect is executed in the direction from the last keyframe to the first keyframe When the NORM REV button is lit Each time the effect is executed the direction reverses Executing Effects 141 spay 8 S12 H7 g 401064 142 Executing an effect up to the next keyframe Use the follovving procedure 1 Press the STOP NEXT KF button turning it on 2 Press the RUN button This executes the effect as far as the next keyframe When the REV button is lit it is executed as far as the previous keyframe Repeating an effect Use the follovving procedure 1 Press the EFF LOOP button turning it on 2 Press the RUN button This executes the effect repeatedly from the first keyframe to the last keyframe When the REV button is lit the effect is executed in the reverse direction 3 To stop the repeating effect press the EFF LOOP button turning it off or press the REWIND button Executing Effects Saving Effects VVhen you recall an effect the currently recalled effect is automatically saved in a register This is referred to as the auto save function You can disable the auto save function in a Setup menu By means of the follovving operation you can also specify a register and save an effect in it Saving a
167. e explosion pattern e Circle e Rectangle e Star e Heart e Ellipse 2 Set the following parameters e When Circle was selected in step 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Degree of transition 0 00 to 100 00 2 Curve Degree to which image periphery 0 00 to 100 00 expands 3 Spiral 5 of curvature of transition 100 00 to 100 00 pa e When Rectangle Star Heart or Ellipse was selected in step 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Degree of transition 0 00 to 100 00 DME Special Effect Operations Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Curve Degree to which image periphery 0 00 to 100 00 expands Aspect Aspect ratio of waveform 100 00 to 100 00 Angle Slant of vvaveform 8 000 to 8 000 To make the fragments stardust Use the following procedure 1 Press Pixel turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Density Degree to which image 0 00 to 100 00 disappears 2 Random Degree of randomness in flying 1 0 00 to 100 00 out fragment positions To set the explosion center point Use the following procedure 1 Press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Center point in horizontal 5 000 to 5 000 direction 2 V Center point in vertica
168. e list across serial ports connected to the same disk recorder For details of file list sharing settings see Sharing disk recorder file lists page 227 Sorting files in the list You can sort the files in the list by name number or update date Use the following procedure 106 Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 1 2 m the Device menu press VF3 VTR and HF3 File List The Device gt VTR DDR gt File List menu appears Select the device for which you want to recall the file list using the knob Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 1 Dev Device number 1 to 12 In the lt Sort gt group press one of File Name File No and Update File Name Sort in alphabetical order of file name File No Sort in ascending file number order Update Sort in file update date order newest first This sorts the files in the selected order Recalling a file To recall a file from the file list use the following procedure 1 2 In the Device menu press VF3 VTR and HF3 File List The Device gt VTR DDR gt File List menu appears Select the device from which you want to recall a file using the knob Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 1 Dev Device number 1 to 12 Using any of the following methods select the file you want to recall e Press directly on the lower list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse v
169. e new setting In addition to the above operation the effect duration may also be changed as a result of inserting or deleting keyframes See Time Settings in Chapter I Volume 1 Setting the Delay To set the delay see Time Settings in chapter I Volume 1 use the following procedure 1 2 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on Press the DELAY button turning it on The display in the numeric keypad control block shows DELAY followed by the delay time seconds frames Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block enter the timecode value for the delay as a maximum of four digits You can also use the TRIM button to enter a difference value See To enter a difference value page 119 Press the ENTER button to confirm the entry This changes the delay setting Time Settings 135 spay 8 S12 H3 g Je deyo 136 Path Setting The term path refers to the specification of hovv interpolation is carried out from one keyframe to the next For details of the notion of path see Paths in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Set keyframe paths in the Key Frame gt Path menu To access the Key Frame gt Path menu In the top menu selection buttons of the menu control block press KEYFRAME then select HF3 Path Basic Procedure for Path Settings Selecting the category From the 1
170. e the setting for the DME A menu appears according to the selection 3 Carry out either of the following depending on the selection you made in step 2 When you selected Switcher Aspect In each of the lt M E 1 gt lt M E 2 gt lt M E 3 gt lt P P gt and lt USER gt groups select either 16 9 or 4 3 When you selected DME Aspect For each of the lt CH1 gt to lt CH4 gt groups select either 16 9 or 4 3 Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu To set the initial state at start up use the System gt Start Up menu It is not possible to set the DCU state at start up but its settings can be saved in the control panel To display the Start Up menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF1 System and HF4 Start Up The status area shows the current start up mode settings Setup for the Whole System 199 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 Selecting the state at start up Use the follovving procedure 1 In the status area of the System gt Start Up menu select the device to which the settings are to apply 2 In the lt Start Up Mode gt group select one of the following modes Resume When this is on Resume mode is enabled Custom When this is on Custom mode is enabled For information about Resume mode and Custom mode see System Setup in Chapter 1 Volume 1 The Resume mode is only valid when a switcher or control panel
171. ect on automatically turns all other nonlinear effects off DME Special Effect Operations To turn an effect off In the setting menu press the button for the effect name turning it off or in the Type menu press OFF in the lower right part of the window Wave settings The Wave effect produces a wave like effect in the image To apply the Wave effect With the Wave menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the lt Mode gt group select the wave modulation mode H amp V Modulate vertically and horizontally without changing the size of the image This mode allows waves to be created in both the vertical and horizontal directions at the same time SIZE Create waves by reducing and expanding the image This mode allows waves to be created in one direction only Size not modulated and are same size H amp V Before modulation Create waves by reducing and expanding the image SIZE 2 Set the following parameters according to the selected mode e When H amp V is selected DME Special Effect Operations 39 suones do IWA s deu suones do JWA 0840 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp H Amplitude of waves in horizontal 0 00 to 100 00 direction 2 Freq H Frequency of waves in horizontal 0 00 to 100 00 direction 3 Offset Ha 1 Horizontal direction in which
172. ed press the NEXT KF button e To move the edit point to the keyframe immediately before the current time press the PREV KF button To move the edit point to a keyframe specified by number press the GO TO KF button then enter the keyframe number with the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block and press the ENTER button to confirm Specifying the Region and Edit Points e To move the edit point to a specified timecode press the GO TO TC button then enter the timecode value with the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block and press the ENTER button to confirm To enter a difference value When moving to a point specified with the GO TO KF button or GO TO TC button you can also enter the difference from the current keyframe number or timecode value Press the numeric keypad button and enter the difference then press the TRIM button Each time you press the button it toggles between plus and minus Specifying the Region and Edit Points 119 spay 8 910 2 g 4010640 120 Creating and Editing Keyframes For details of keyframe editing see Effect Editing in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Creation Creating nevv keyframes To create new keyframes after recalling an empty register use the following procedure to create and insert each new keyframe Use the keyframe control block for
173. ed the STOP button lights amber Press the RUN button in the keyframe control block The VTR disk recorder is now controlled according to the keyframe data Setting the start point stop point and start delay time in a menu In the Device menu you can set the start point stop point and start delay time To make the setting use the following procedure 1 In the Device menu press VF3 VTR and 1 Cueup amp Play The Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu appears The status area shows the device name register number status information current time start point stop point and start delay time Using any of the following methods select the device e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting 1 Dev Device number 1 to 12 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Carry out any of the following operations as required e To set the start point press SET in the lt Start TC gt group Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 99 S IA Q eux Z 108 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 1064 e To set the stop point press SET in the lt Stop TC gt group e To set the start delay time point press SET in the lt Delay gt group A timecode window appears 4 Set the timecode value for the start point stop point or start delay time You can enter a start delay ti
174. ed Speed at which the hue 12 00 to 12 00 changes Erasing the afterimages that remain in memory whenever a keyframe is passed Press Trail Eraser turning it on This erases the afterimages before another effect passes a keyframe writing new afterimages Selecting the freeze timing In the lt Trail Freeze Timing gt group select the timing for freezing a trail Frame freeze in frame units Field freeze in field units Applying stardust trails The trail dissolves slowly in a cloud of dust 1 Press the DUST button turning it on DME Special Effect Operations 69 suones do IWA 1010840 suones do JWA 0840 70 2 Set the follovving parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adiustment Setting values 1 Trail Dust Amount of the trail disappearing as 1 0 00 to 100 00 stardust 2 Dust Soft Timing with which stardust 0 00 to 100 00 disappears Dust Size Size of stardust 0 00 to 100 00 4 Dust Aspect Aspect ratio of stardust 100 00 to 100 00 a The way in which the trail disappears is affected by both Decay and Trail Dust parameter adjustments Motion Decay Settings When the video image is a moving image you can blur the motion by creating motion trails or afterimages For sample images see DME Special Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 When you turn on motion decay if the trail or keyframe strobe effect is on it automatically goes o
175. effect on the keyframe to which you want to apply a pause 3 Press the PAUSE button This applies a pause to the specified keyframe Keyframe Loop Repeated Execution of a Specified Range By setting the range of the loop within the effect and the number of loop executions you can execute the loop range repeatedly It is only possible to set one keyframe loop for each region Creating a new keyframe loop To specify the loop range and loop count carry out the following procedure 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect on the keyframe you want to make the first of the loop range start point Here by way of example keyframe 2 is taken as the start point 3 Press the KF LOOP button in the keyframe control block turning it on The numeric keypad control block display shows the start point keyframe number as follows The example shown means from keyframe 2 to where the end keyframe is to follow Creating and Editing Keyframes 4 VVith the numeric keypad buttons of the numeric keypad control block enter the number of the last keyframe in the loop range end point Here by vvay of example keyframe 5 is the end point FM 2 TO 5 5 Press the ENTER button to confirm the entry The display changes as follows prompting you to enter the loop count COUNT 6 Enter the loop count Here by way of example 15 is entered e To specify a loop count enter a numbe
176. eisen nese ire E E 76 Global Effect Operations 78 Combiner Settings 78 Brick Settings mineets reni enoi kop e Eea E 81 Shadow Setthgs issin ies a a UD eoe EE S 84 Three Dimensional Transformation Operations Use the device control block to carry out three dimensional DME transformations For details of three dimensional DME coordinate space see Three Dimensional Transformations in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Basic Operations This section explains hovv to use a trackball type device control block to carry out three dimensional transformations Function assignment buttons Region selection buttons DME1 to 8 Trackball Operating buttons Z ring Device control block vvith a trackball Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 13 suones do 11 s deu suones do JWA 0840 Transforming an image in three dimensional coordinate space Use the follovving procedure 1 VVith the region selection buttons select the target channel of the operation You can press several of the buttons simultaneously to select several channels In this case the button tha
177. elected in the list on the left of the status area Repeat steps 1 to 5 for other GPI output ports as required Testing trigger output To test the trigger output press Test Fire According to the list settings on the left of the status area a pulse is output from the selected output port Clearing output port settings To clear the settings for each device GPI output port Use the following procedure 1 In the list on the left of the status area select the GPI output port whose settings you want to clear Control of GPI Devices 2 m the list on the right select Off 3 Press Set To clear the settings for all devices GPI output ports in a single operation Press Off Setting the action for a rewind operation On the GPI timeline when the REWIND button in the keyframe control block is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting in the Device gt GPI Timeline menu press Rewind Action to recall the Rewind Action menu In this setting screen use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the GPI timeline Alternatively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first
178. en the input is low or high No Operation Apply no trigger on an input pulse 4 In the lt Target gt group select what this applies to channels to 4 or Proc 5 Using any of the following methods select the action to be set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Action Action selection 1 to 2 4 Reg No Register number 1 to 99 5 1 to 399 0 a Action list when the trigger type is other than Level When Target is Chl Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 Freeze 55 Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind KF Reverse Run No Action When Target is Proc No Action Action list when the trigger type is Level When Target is Chl Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 Aspect No Action When Target is Proc Format frame field rate number of lines Aspect No Action b When knob 3 selection is Snapshot c When knob 3 selection is Effect 6 Press Action Set to confirm the action selection The selected setting appears in the status area Carrying out level settings To set the low level and high level first set the trigger type to Level then use the following procedure 1 In the DME gt Device Interface menu select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu appears 262 Setup Relating to DME
179. ently used menu to be recalled menu shortcut Utility Command Assign a function enable disable or similar operation utility command Shotbox Recall Assign a shotbox register recall 218 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 3 Depending on the selection in step 2 make the following settings When Menu Shortcut is selected For the subsequent operations see the next item Assigning a menu shortcut to a user preference button page 219 When Utility Command is selected A list of commands appears on the right of the status area using any of the following methods select the command you want to assign e Press directly on the list e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Command Utility command selection When Shotbox Recall is selected Turn the knob to select the shotbox register you want to assign Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Shotbox Shotbox register selection 1 to 99 4 Press Action Set This assigns the selected action which is reflected in the status area To cancel an assignment After selecting the relevant button press Clear Assigning a menu shortcut to a user preference button Use the following procedure 1 Referring to the procedure up to step 2 in the previous item select Menu Shortcut The user preference buttons PREF
180. er reloading 204 User programmable DME 339 341 transition mode 132 User region setting 238 User defined settings 200 Utility execution 178 in the utility shotbox con trol block 179 with user preference but tons 178 V Vertical blanking interval ad justment 242 Video clip adjustment 242 process memory 247 switching settings 244 switching timing 235 Virtual image cancellation 22 VTR control 94 Cueup amp Play 96 information check 95 timeline 101 timeline editing 102 WwW Wave settings 39 Wipe pattern list 330 settings 246 Wiring settings 281 Working buffer clearing 19 Wrap Around 22 VVrite protecting 151 X XPT HOLD button operation mode 248 The material contained in this manual consists of infor mation that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equip ment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur pose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation Sony Corporation B amp P Company DVS 9000 9000SF Printed in Japan System WW http www sony net 2003 02 13 3 704 667 02 1 Printed on recycled paper 2002
181. es To apply an attribute to a snapshot use the following procedure 1 In the Snapshot menu press VF2 Snapshot and HF1 Attribute The Snapshot gt Attribute menu appears The status area shows the region names register numbers and the status and attributes set Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection window then select the region in the selection window Selecting multiple regions is also possible Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Using either of the following methods select the register e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Register Register number 1 to 99 3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99 e To select all registers press All Snapshot Operations in the Menus 5 In the lt Attribute gt group press the buttons for the attributes you want to apply turning them on Carry out the following procedures for each of the attributes To apply the cross point hold attributes 1 Press XPT Hold turning it on The Snapshot gt Attribute gt Xpt Hold menu appears The status area shows a list of the currently selected regions and bus names 2 Using either of the following methods select the register e Press directly on the list in the status
182. es off Creating a Shotbox Register Using the Menus Accessing the Shotbox menu Carry out creation and editing of shotbox registers in the Shotbox menu To access the Shotbox menu use any of the following methods e Inthe menu control block press the top menu selection button SHOTBOX e In the numeric keypad control block press the SHOTBOX button twice in rapid succession Creating a shotbox register Use the following procedure 1 In the Shotbox menu press VF1 Register and HF1 Store Recall The Store Recall menu appears Shotbox Register Creation 183 xoqlous nn 51 4eldeyo xoqlous n Si s ydeuo 184 m the status area the settings for each register appear as follovvs Region settings Appear as Sxxx when a snapshot is allocated and as Exxx when an effect is allocated xxx is the register number The register name also appears If nothing is allocated nothing appears in the display Register lock setting When the register is write protected an L for lock appears Empty status When the register is empty an E for empty appears Auto run setting When this is enabled so that an effect is executed simultaneously with recall AR appears Shotbox register name This shows the shotbox register name If necessary switch the region display by pressing one of the following buttons in the status area M E P P Shows the allocations
183. espectively USER 1 to USER 8 Select a user region DME 1 to DME 4 Select a DME channel ALL Select all regions together MASTR Select a master snapshot The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block See Assigning the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block page 210 It is not possible to select MASTR and other regions simultaneously If selected simultaneously the master snapshot takes precedence The first pressed button lights green as the reference region and subsequently pressed buttons light amber For details of the precedence order for becoming the reference region see Regions and registers in Chapter I Volume 1 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 161 sjoysdeus p s d sjoysdeus p s deu The display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the register previously recalled for that region 3 Enter the desired register number from the numeric keypad See step 5 page 160 in Saving a snapshot from the numeric keypad control block The entered register number appears in the display 4 To apply temporary attributes press the following buttons turning them on Control block Temporary Button attribute to apply Cross point control 1 A B bus cross point XPT HOLD button in the block hold background A B
184. ever it is not necessary to specify a region in shotbox register editing Shotbox Register Editing 191 xoqlous nn 51 4eldeyo xoqlous n Si s ydeuo 192 Shotbox Register Editing Chapter 16 Engineering Setup Setup for the Whole 195 Network Settings Network Config Menu 195 System Settings System Config 6222 196 Setting the Signal Format and Screen Aspect Ratio RormatiMent poner cet re ee ee 198 Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu 199 Reset and Initialization Initialize Menu 201 Installation Install ee aeaaeae aea eee 202 System Maintenance Maintenance Menu 203 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 205 Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu 205 Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign 5222 2 AUX Delegation Buttons Settings Aux Assign Menu 216 Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu 218 Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu 222 Operation Settings Operation 2 228 Screen Saver and Other Settings Maintenance Menu 232 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
185. f To stop the waves Press Lock turning it on With each press the waves alternately stop and start moving again 44 DME Special Effect Operations To select the vvaveform Press Form and set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Form H Waveform in horizontal direction 1 4 fo 6 3 2 Form V VVaveform in vertical direction 1 to 62 a 1 SINE Sine wave 2 PARABOLA Parabola wave 3 TRIANGLE Triangular wave 4 RECTANGLE Rectangular wave 5 CIRCLE Circular wave 6 CUBIC Cubic wave Ripple settings Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image To apply the Ripple effect With the Ripple menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the lt Mode gt group select the ripple modulation mode Radial Points on radii of the same length from the center of the ripples behave in the same way Angular Points at the same angle from the center of the ripples behave in the same way Both Both Radial and Angular ripples are applied Shape The ripples can have shapes such as stars or hearts in addition to circles Modulation along radii Radial mode Modulation along periphery Angular mode Modulation modes and directions DME Special Effect Operations suones do IWA 11 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 2 Set the following parameters depending on the selected modulation mode When R
186. ference button to which MCRO ONLY SET is assigned turning it on 3 Hold down the cross point control block PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button and press the desired button in the background A or B row The cross point button you pressed flashes green and the register you recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button The MCRO ONLY SET button goes off To check macro attachment settings Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button While it is held down buttons for which macro attachments are set flash as follows While the PRE MCRO button is held down e Buttons set in pre macro mode flash amber e Buttons set in macro only mode flash green While the POST MCRO button is held down e Buttons set in post macro mode flash amber e Buttons set in macro only mode flash green Removing macro attachment settings Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button and press a button that is flashing in the background A or B row The button for which the macro attachment is set stops flashing and goes off and this removes the setting To remove all macro attachment settings in a single operation You can remove all macro attachment settings from the buttons in the background A and B rows in a single operation Use the following procedure 1 In the Macro menu select VF2 Attachment 2 Press Clear A confirmation message appears 3 Select Yes This deletes all macro attachment setting data Mac
187. ff Blurring image motion Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF5 Light Trail and HF3 Motion Decay The Motion Decay menu appears 2 Press Motion Decay turning it on This enables motion decay and you can now use the knobs to adjust the parameters 3 Set the following parameter Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Decay Degree of blurring of the video signal 0 00 to 100 00 2 a At the setting 0 00 there is no afterimage At a setting of 100 00 the afterimage does not decay DME Special Effect Operations 4 In the lt Decay Mix Mode gt group select the way in which the video signal is blurred Soft mix the live image with the afterimage Hard show the lighter of the live image and afterimage 5 To erase the afterimage press Decay Eraser turning it on To erase the afterimage from memory each time a keyframe is passed Press Decay Eraser turning it on When the effect passes a keyframe the afterimage is erased before writing a new afterimage Selecting the freeze timing In the lt Decay Freeze Timing gt group select the timing for motion decay freezing Frame freeze in frame units Field freeze in field units Applying stardust to the afterimage portion The afterimage portion becomes stardust and gradually disappears 1 Press the DUST button turning it on 2 Set the following parameters
188. ffect and HF3 Copy Merge e The Copy Merge menu appears e The left side of the status area shows a list for the register coming afterward when merged The right side shows a list for the register coming before when merged Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region Selecting multiple regions is also possible Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Using any of the following methods select the register e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Register Operations in the Menus 153 spay 08 910 2 g 4010640 5 e Turn the knobs to make the settings Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 From Reg The register coming afterwards when 1 to 99 merged 2 To Reg The register coming before when merged 11 to 99 Press Merge This carries out the merge Deleting data from effect registers Use the following procedure 1 2 In the Effect menu press VF2 Effect and HF6 Delete The Delete menu appears Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection window then select the region in the selection window Selecting multiple regions is also possible Press OK The selected region name appears in the
189. ffect 101 199 Effect 201 299 VF3 Snapshot Wipe Snapshot Snapshot Key Snapshot VF4 Shotbox Macro Macro m Attachment VF5 Frame Memory The follovving description refers to the example of carrying out operations on snapshot files but the procedure is similar in the other menus Vievving Detailed File Information As an example to view detailed snapshot file information carry out the following procedure 1 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot The Snapshot menu appears The status area shows the device status and a list of files present on the device 294 Operations on Individual Files RTR Setup init fF HDD SYSTEM Effect SS_001 SS_002 SS 004 SS 005 Shotbox SS_006 SS_007 SS 008 Frame Mem SS 009 SS 010 55 011 All External File 55 012 Detail shot EA DME Key Snapshot Snapshot Snapshot 2 Press File Edit Configure The file details appear reference region file name creation date regions including data in table form Device selection area Region selection display area Page 7131 1 Setup Init VKMem Effect Date Time Jan 22 2003 11 26 2003 11 25 Jan 22 2003 11 25 22 2003 11 25 Shotbox o a gt D 2 o x 2 m o o Jan 22 2003 11 25 22 2003 11 25 dan 22 2003 11 25 Frame Mem All External File Rename Configure Wipe DME Key Sna
190. from 0 to 9 Example 7 8 9 liL ii 4 5 6 f 1 2 3 0 The selected bank number appears in the numeric display Each button in the memory recall section shows the corresponding register name and register status for the selected bank Note that in the Setup menu you can select whether to display register names or register numbers Lit orange Register holding macro data Lit yellow Last recalled register Off Empty register Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 317 soey 81 saydeyD soe 81 131deyo 318 3 Press the button in the memory recall section showing the name of the register to be recalled The button you pressed lights yellow the macro register is recalled and the macro is executed During macro execution the button you pressed remains yellow but flashes When macro execution completes it returns to permanently on The numeric display shows the bank name followed by the selected register number e It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time e During macro execution recalling the same register again stops the macro being executed e Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in setup If you change the settings in setup a saved macro may not have the expected effect e During macro execution if you
191. g buttons In the lt Double Click group select Fast Normal or Slow Main split fader specification In the lt Main Split Fader gt group of the Panel gt Operation menu select Left or Right Screen Saver and Other Settings Maintenance Menu To make settings relating to the screen saver etc use the Panel gt Maintenance menu To display the Maintenance menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF7 Maintenance 232 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel The status area shovvs a list of the items vvith their settings Screen saver settings To enable the menu screen saver use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Maintenance menu press Screen Saver turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Sleep Time Time until screen saver starts 1 to 300 minutes operation Adjusting the brightness You can adjust each of the following brightnesses independently LCD Adjust the brightness of the source name displays and the LCD buttons in the Flexi Pad control block LED Adjust the brightness of the LED displays in the numeric keypad control block and so forth Switch Adjust the brightness of the panel switches The following description takes the LCD brightness as an example Use a similar process for the other adjustments 1 In the Panel gt Maintenance menu press LCD Brightness 2
192. gions and registers see Regions and Registers in Chapter I Volume 1 EFF button UNDO button Display 000000000000 Region selection buttons RCALL button Numeric keypad control block Recalling a register Use the follovving procedure 1 Press the TEFF button turning it on This allocates the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations and the RCALL button lights Recalling a Register 115 spay 8 s 2 43 g Je deyo 116 2 Press the button corresponding to the region you vvant to select turning it on You can also press more than one button M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P These select the corresponding M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST regions USER 1 to USER 8 These select the USER regions DME 1 to DME 4 These select DME channels DEV 1 to DEV 12 These select the regions DEV 1 to DEV 12 respectively P BUS This selects P BUS ALL This selects all valid regions MASTR This selects the master timeline see Creating and Saving a Master Timeline page 145 The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block See
193. gt Ch1 Ch4 menu select HF1 Combiner The Combiner menu appears Global Effect Operations 2 If either of Mix and Auto is on turn it off 3 Set the overlap priority for Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 as follows For case Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Under lt Priority1 gt to lt Priority3 gt press Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 respectively to set the overlap priority Priority1 Select the channel with the highest priority Priority2 Select the channel with the second highest priority Priority3 Select the channel with the lowest priority Priority1 Ch1 Priority2 Ch2 Priority3 Ch3 Ch1 Ch2 For case Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Under lt Combiner Priority 1 gt and lt Combiner Priority 2 gt press Ch1 and Ch2 respectively and under lt Combiner 2 Priority 15 and lt Combiner 2 Priority 2 gt press Ch4 and Ch3 respectively to set the respective priorities for overlaying the images Combiner1 Priority1 Ch1 Combiner1 Priority2 Ch2 Combiner2 Priority1 Ch4 Chi Combiner2 Priority2 Ch3 Ch2 Mixing the images of up to three consecutive channels Use the following procedure 1 In the Combiner menu press Mix turning it on Global Effect Operations 79 suones do IWA 11 s deu suones do JWA 0840 2 Adjust the following parameters For Ch1 Ch2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix
194. he CLEAR button This clears the set loop count 6 Enter the new loop count and press the ENTER button Executing a keyframe loop In the keyframe control block press the RUN button The set loop range is executed repeatedly for the set loop count number of times The screen shows the total loop count and the number of loops remaining If the loop count is infinite inf the remaining number is not shown If the REV button is lit the loop is played in the reverse order Canceling keyframe loop execution Press the REWIND button in the keyframe control block Changes to the loop range caused by keyframe insertion deletion When a keyframe is inserted or deleted within the loop range the loop range also changes The following are examples Example 1 If keyframe 3 is deleted the loop end point moves forward as follows 130 Creating and Editing Keyframes 1 2 3 Deletion 1 2 3 After deleton T 7 77 4 Before deletion 222 5 6 7 5 6 7 Loop range Example 2 If keyframe 3 is added the end point keyframe number moves back 2 3 Addition 1 2 3 4 1 5 Before addition 1 222222222222224 After addition WMH 5 6 7 Loop range Example 3 If the keyframe at the end of the loop range the end point is deleted the keyframe loop settings are all cleared as follows and the KF LOOP button goes off The same
195. he Multi Move menu appears 2 Press Multi Move turning it on The Multi Move effect is enabled You can adjust the center point of shrinking the ratio of shrinking and the aspect ratio of the shrunken images with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Parameter limits vary as shown below depending on the aspect ratio 4 3 or 16 9 selected in the system e 4 3 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Center X x value of shrinking center point 4 00 to 4 00 2 Center Y y value of shrinking center point 3 00 to 3 00 DME Special Effect Operations 31 suones do IWA 11 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 3 Size Shrinking ratio 0 00 to 100 00 4 Aspect Aspect ratio of shrunken images 100 00 to 100 00 2 e 16 9 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Center X x value of shrinking center point 4 00 to 4 00 2 Center Y y value of shrinking center point 2 25 to 2 25 3 Size Shrinking ratio 0 00 to 100 00 4 Aspect Aspect ratio of shrunken images 100 00 to 100 00 a Specify minus values to stretch the image in the vertical direction and plus values to stretch the image in the horizontal direction Sepia Settings This effect overlays a specified color onto the image Applying the Sepia effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2
196. he image melts away Up Melting occurs upward Down Melting occurs downward 2 To make transition settings press Transition and set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Degree of transition 0 00 to 100 00 2 Curve Degree to which image stretches 0 00 to 100 00 3 Random Degree of jaggies at melted part 1 0 00 to 100 00 DME Special Effect Operations 3 To make wave settings for melting part press Border and set the following parameters a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off To stop the waves in the melting part Press Lock turning it on With each press the waves alternately stop and start moving again To select the shape of the part beginning to melt Press Form and set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Form Waveform 1 to 82 a 1 SINE Sine wave 2 PARABOLA Parabola wave 3 TRIANGLE Triangular wave 4 RECTANGLE Rectangular wave 5 CIRCLE Circular wave 6 CUBIC Cubic wave 7 MELT1 Melting wave 1 8 MELT2 Melting wave 2 To make the melting part stardust Use the following procedure 1 Press Pixel turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values become more randomized further from the center 1 Density Degree to which image 0 00 to 100 00 dis
197. hot on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 On a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to delete a snapshot In the M E 1 bank Flexi Pad control block press the SNAPSHOT button This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to snapshot operations The numeric display shows the last selected bank number and the last recalled register number on the corresponding switcher bank Select the bank for the register containing the snapshot you want to delete See step 3 page 166 in Saving a snapshot with the Flexi Pad control block Hold down the STORE STATS button then hold down the button in the memory recall section displaying the number of the corresponding register The button you pressed goes off and this deletes the snapshot The STORE STATS button lights amber Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 169 sjoysdeus p 8 sjoysdeus p s deu 170 Snapshot Operations in the Menus You can also set snapshot or key snapshot attributes in the Snapshot menu which also displays the status of the registers To access the Snapshot menu press the top menu selection button SNAPSHOT in the menu control block In the Snapshot menu as well as setting snapshot attributes you can carry out editing operations on snapshots including copy and delete See Snapshot Register Editing page 175 Setting Snapshot Attributes Applying snapshot attribut
198. hree Dimensional Parameter Display 17 Entering Three Dimensional Parameter 5 2222 18 Graphics Display ssi l RAZ 19 Canceling Virtual 5 22 DME Special Effect Operations 23 Border Set ng sinini ese ek hae ii OUR tibiae 23 Crop Settings 2 ccd ene ease kage tees ees eater tees 25 Beveled Edge 8 10195 27 A AR URSU 29 Blur 30 M lti Move Setting U aa eerren a resis 31 Sua s 32 Mono Settings s B BABA 33 Posterization and Solarization 8 10 95 2222 33 Nega Settings 21 cn nea s ODUR 34 ContrastSettingssss Rte West suite ieee eestor apes 34 Mosaic Settim os aeeie SoA es S Ae edges es DS 35 Frez Settings sss sos set ooe conch os EE EE 36 Nonlinear Effect 521001 95 37 Lighting Settings eheee lok R Y R DD Eas 64 Trail Set G8 3 05 Soe Aas Mae eee eae na alu 67 Motion Decay 58 011 95 70 Keyframe Strobe 8 10101 95 71 Background 8 011 95 2 73 Separate Sides
199. ich the settings apply e In the list appearing in the menu press the desired device name e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor The selected switcher appears in reverse video If there is only one switcher on the network carry out the SVVR1 setting for the first switcher only Make the DME settings as follows e When making DME settings for SVVR1 the first switcher for the first DME select DME1 in the clst DME gt group Turn all buttons in the lt 2nd DME gt group off Setup for the Whole System 197 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 sajdeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 198 e When making DME settings for SVVR2 the second switcher for the first DME select DME3 in the lt 1st DME gt group Turn all buttons in the lt 2nd DME gt group off Setup in Dual Simul mode When the system operation mode see page 196 is set to Dual Simul the following setting is required for setup of the two switchers and connected DME units In the lt Setup Target gt group set the System 1 or System 2 button to ON then carry out the setup You can also set both to ON and make the settings simultaneously on the two systems Setting the Signal Format and Screen Aspect Ratio Format Menu To set the format that is the frame frequency and number of scan lines handled by each device and the screen aspect ratio use the System gt Format menu To display the Format menu In the Engineeri
200. ideo cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 2 No File selection 1 to 5000 a The range of setting values depends on the total number of files maximum 5000 Press Load This recalls the selected file and the file name appears at the top of the status area Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 107 S 1A Q eux Z Jaydeyo S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 10642 108 Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects Sequence of Keyframe Operations 111 Displaying the Timeline 112 Interpreting the Timeline 112 LETAT EE EE A E A A O 03 A 115 Specifying the Region and Edit Pointts 118 Creating and Editing Keyframes 120 TIO E A E OS 120 SaO E A EE E E E A UUA6 121 E E 121 125 126 r SU 127 PAUSEN rara E EA 128 Keyframe Loop Repeated Execution of a Specified Range 128 Undoing aM Edit Operatore eee E E E A 131 DOM ode S e E 132 Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DME 132 PRIME SEUtIMGS
201. ified shotbox register on recall the effect is immediately executed If you recall an empty register then shotbox execution has no effect When auto run is not set for the recalled register Simply recalling the register does not run the effect To do this in the keyframe control block press the RUN button Shotbox Execution in the Flexi Pad Control Block Use the following procedure In the simple type of Flexi Pad control block shotbox operations are not possible 1 In the Flexi Pad control block press the SHOTBOX button lighting the SHOTBOX button amber e This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to shotbox operations e The previously selected bank number and the last recalled register number appear in the numeric display Using any of the following methods select the bank e To select a register in bank 0 press the BANK 0 button e To select a register in bank 1 press the BANK 1 button Shotbox Execution 187 xoqlous nn SL 0108 xoqlous n S s ydeuo 188 e Press the BANK SEL button and when the memory recall section display changes as follows press the button from 0 to 9 corresponding to the bank you want to select 0 REWIND RUN Shotbox Execution e The numeric display shows the selected bank number e The buttons in the memory recall section show the names and states of the registe
202. in parts of the menu display Delay numerical display Pause point Effect 1 50 6 Keyframe status 6 Region name and register number Knob adiustment Keyframe display number m O Total total S T timeline Delay display length on timeline o oo wm Effect aie z t duration Display start O Display m end time me E Key Frame gt Timeline menu 112 Displaying the Timeline Menu Keyframe status This shovvs the region name register number register name number of remaining keyframes current position and timecode with regard to the reference region Region name and register number This shows the region name and the number of the register recalled in this region The display color indicates the region selection as follows Blue reference region White selected region Gray not selected region Delay numerical display This shows the delay between carrying out an effect operation and the start of the actual effect Keyframe number total This shovvs the number of the keyframe at the cursor position and the total number of keyframes in the register Display start time This shovvs the timecode value for the timeline display start point O Display end time This shovvs the timecode value for the timeline display end point Delay display on timeline When a delay is set the interv
203. in the Numeric Keypad Control Block This section describes macro operations carried out in the numeric keypad control block For an overview of macros see Macros in Chapter 1 Volume 1 For macro operations in the numeric keypad control block use the following buttons UNDO button STORE STATS button MCRO button Display ooocodhooooo RCALL button Numeric keypad STORE button 310 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro To carry out a macro operation recall a macro register Recalling an empty register allows you to carry out macro editing operations Recalling a register holding a macro executes the macro immediately To recall a macro register use the following procedure 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the MCRO button turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to macro operations and the RCALL button lights 2 Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button The display shows the corresponding register number A letter E after the number indicates that the corresponding register is empty
204. ing procedure It is not possible to write protect an empty register 1 In the Effect menu press VF2 Effect and HF2 Lock The Lock menu appears Register Operations in the Menus 151 spay sajdeyo 910 2 g 4010640 152 2 3 Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection window then select the region in the selection window Selecting multiple regions is also possible Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list 4 Using either of the following methods select the register e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Register Register number 1 to 99 3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99 e To select all registers press AlI 5 Press Lock write protecting the register Copying moving and swapping effect register data This section describes the procedure for copying You can move or swap registers using a similar procedure 1 In the Effect menu press VF2 Effect and HF3 Copy Merge e The Copy Merge menu appears e The left side of the status area shows the register number of the copy source and the right side shows the register number of the copy destination Press the region dis
205. int and variable speed settings Use the following procedure 1 In the upper list in the status area select the device for which you want to clear the settings 2 Carry out any of the following operations as required e To clear the start point setting in the lt Start TC gt group press Clear e To clear the stop point setting in the lt Stop TC gt group press Clear e To clear the variable speed setting in the lt Variable Speed gt group press Clear To set the action for a rewind operation On the VTR disk recorder timeline when the REWIND button in the keyframe control block is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting in the Device gt VTR DDR gt Timeline menu press Rewind Action to recall the Rewind Action menu In this setting screen use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the VTR disk recorder timeline Alternatively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details of the setting see Setting the first keyframe whe
206. ion ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 Curve H Curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 3 Size H Size 0 00 to 100 00 4 Angle Slant angle 8 000 to 8 000 5 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 e When Bar is selec ted Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Magnify H Magnification ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 Curve H Curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 3 Size H Size 0 00 to 100 00 4 Angle Slant angle 8 000 to 8 000 DME Special Effect Operations When Cross is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Magnify H Horizontal magnification ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 Curve H Horizontal curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 3 Size H Horizontal size 0 00 to 100 00 6 Magnify V Vertical magnification ratio 100 00 to 100 00 7 Curve V Vertical curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 8 Size V Vertical size 0 00 to 100 00 To make only the lens part visible Press Lens Only turning it on to remove the parts of the image outside the lens To set the lens center position Use the following procedure 1 Press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal lens center position 5 000 to 5 000 2 V Vertical lens center position 4 000 to 4 000 Circle settings The Circle effect makes a circle with the image To apply the Circle effect With the
207. is executed for the switcher and DME controlled by the selected control panel Using any of the following methods select the action you want to set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Action Action selection 1 to 2 5 Reg No Register number 1to 4 1 to 99 1 to 399 4 a Action list when the trigger type is other than Level M E 1 Cut M E 2 Cut M E 3 Cut P P Cut M E 1 Auto Trans M E 2 Auto Trans M E 3 Auto Trans P P Auto Trans M E 1 Keyl Auto Trans M E 1 1 Cut M E 1 Key2 Auto Trans M E 1 Key2 Cut M E 1 Key3 Auto Trans M E 1 Key3 Cut M E 1 Key4 Auto Trans M E 1 Key4 Cut M E 2 Keyl Auto Trans M E 2 1 Cut M E 2 Key2 Auto Trans M E 2 Key2 Cut Setup Relating to DCU 267 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dm s 9 4 268 M E 2 Key3 Auto Trans M E 2 Key3 Cut M E 2 Key4 Auto Trans M E 2 Key4 Cut M E 3 Keyl Auto Trans M E 3 1 Cut M E 3 Key2 Auto Trans M E 3 Key2 Cut M E 3 Key3 Auto Trans M E 3 Key3 Cut M E 3 Key4 Auto Trans M E 3 Key4 Cut P P DSK1 Auto Trans P P DSK1 Cut P P DSK2 Auto Trans P P DSK2 Cut P P DSK3 Auto Trans P P DSK3 Cut P P DSK4 Auto Trans P P DSK4 Cut FTB Auto Trans FTB Cut SS Recall M E 1 Keyl SS Recall M E 1 Key2 SS Recal
208. ister Creation 5 Using any of the follovving methods select the desired region You may 8 9 select more than one region e Press directly on the region display in the status area turning it to reverse video e Press AlI to select all regions e To cancel a selection press once more to return to the normal display In the lt Assign gt group select the snapshot or effect to be allocated to the region Snapshot Allocate a snapshot register Effect Allocate a keyframe effect Depending on the selection in step 6 set the parameters as follows e When a snapshot is selected Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Snapshot Snapshot register number 1 to 99 e When an effect is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Effect Keyframe effect number 1 to 99 3 a For the DME region you can also set register numbers 101 to 199 and 201 to 299 To run the allocated effect as soon as it is recalled press Auto Run turning it on Repeat steps 5 to 8 as required 1 On the lt Store gt group press Store to save the setting To return to the state before saving the setting In the lt Store gt group press Undo To run the settings to check them Press Recall to run the shotbox Shotbox Register Creation 185 xoqlous nn SL seldeyo xoqlougs n S 10640 Shotbox Execution You can recall and run shotbox registers from the f
209. iting mode the macro being executed stops During macro editing pressing a button for which a macro attachment is set does not execute the macro To disable macro attachment settings In the cross point control block of the M E or PGM PST bank for which you want to disable the settings press the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button turning it off In this state pressing a button for which a macro attachment is set does not execute the macro Macro Attachment Assigning 325 90 81 49 d5EU02 soley 81 131deyo 326 Macro Attachment Assigning Chapter 19 DIAGNOSIS Not supported in version 2 00 Chapter 19 DIAGNOSIS 328 Appendix r eit Eek TAES 000000 330 Standard Wipes cece tote E E E 330 000 331 WIPO es E 332 INTOSAICAWAD CS are eee ere se gee 5005 333 Random Diamond Dust 335 DME Wipe 336 DME Wipe Patterns Available in One Channel Mode 336 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Tvvo Channel Mode 340 LETS ayyy ayyy 342 UT 342 00 342 IGM PS Ta Men ies 344 Erame MemopyaMenu crore cetera ee 000077 345 GoloriBkodiMenu
210. keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details of the setting see Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is executed page 229 Control of GPI Devices 93 S IA Q eux Z Jaydeyo S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 10640 94 Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders To control a VTR or disk recorder in the DVS 9000 system the follovving settings are required e Button assignment For a VTR or disk recorder connected to the DCU 9 pin serial port assign a device selection button in the device control block e Timecode source When using a VTR specify a reference signal used for determining the tape position For details see Making DCU serial port settings page 226 and Making detailed settings on the external device connected to the serial port page 274 Controlling the Tape Disk Transport Switching to VTR disk recorder operation mode To control a VTR or disk recorder press the DEV button in the device control block turning it on This puts the device control block in VTR disk recorder operation mode and the button arrangement changes as shown in the following figure Note that USER RUN CTRL and SHIFT do not operate in VTR disk recorder operation mode
211. keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously For each region any snapshot or keyframe effect number can be specified to be recalled There is also a setting to enable or disable the auto run function For a shotbox overview see Shotbox in Chapter I Volume 1 You can create save shotbox registers in the following control blocks e Numeric keypad control block See Numeric Keypad Control Block in Chapter 2 Volume 1 e Menu control block See Menu Control Block in Chapter 2 Volume 1 Creating a Shotbox Register in the Numeric Keypad Control Block When you create a shotbox register in the numeric keypad control block you carry out separate operations in respect of the snapshot setting data and the effect setting data and save in the register The procedure described here makes the snapshot settings first followed by the effect settings Creating a shotbox register Use the following procedure 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations 2 Specify the register number of the snapshot you want to save in a shotbox register and then recall it for each region For details of the procedure for recalling a register see Recalling a snapshot from the numeric keypad control block page 161 3 Press the SHOTBOX button turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to shot
212. l M E 1 Key3 SS Recall M E 1 Key4 SS Recall M E 2 Keyl SS Recall M E 2 Key2 SS Recall M E 2 Key3 SS Recall M E 2 Key4 SS Recall M E 3 Keyl SS Recall M E 3 Key2 SS Recall M E 3 Key3 SS Recall M E 3 Key4 SS Recall P P DSKI SS Recall P P DSK2 SS Recall P P 1 DSK3 SS Recall P P 1 DSK4 SS Recall FM Srcl Field Freeze FM Srcl Frame Freeze FM Srcl Freeze Off FM Src2 Field Freeze FM Src2 Frame Freeze FM Src2 Freeze Off Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind No Action Action list when the trigger type is Level Simul Custom Format frame field rate number of lines System Format SWR Format DME Ch1 Ch4 Format Aspect System Aspect SWR Aspect M E 1 Aspect M E 2 Aspect M E 3 Aspect P P Aspect DME Ch1 Ch4 Aspect DME Ch Aspect DME Ch2 Aspect DME Ch3 Aspect DME Ch4 Aspect No Action b When knob 2 selection is Key Snapshot c When knob 2 selection is Snapshot d When knob 2 selection is Effect 5 To confirm the setting in step 4 press Action Set This confirms the setting which appears in the status area Carrying out level settings To set the low level and high level first set the trigger type to Level then use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt GPI Input Assign menu select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press di
213. l direction 1 4 000 to 4 000 Svvirl settings The Swirl effect swirls the image To apply the Swirl effect VVith the Svvirl menu displayed set the follovving parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Swirl amount 0 00 to 100 00 2 Center Amount of rotation in center of swirl 8 000 to 8 000 3 Outer Amount of rotation outside of Area 8 000 to 8 000 4 Area Region of swirl 0 00 to 100 00 DME Special Effect Operations 61 suones do IWA 11 4a deyo suones do JWA 0840 62 To make the tip of the svvirl stardust Use the follovving procedure 1 Press Pixel turning it on 2 Set the follovving parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Density Degree to which image 0 00 to 100 00 disappears 2 Random Trail type and amount of stardust 0 00 to 100 00 To set the center position of the swirl Use the following procedure 1 Press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal center position of swirl 8 000 to 8 000 2 V Vertical center position of swirl 6 000 to 6 000 Melt settings The Melt effect melts the image away from a specified part To apply the Melt effect With the Melt menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the lt Direction gt group select the direction in which t
214. le Select gt group select the cross point table you want to assign Creating a sub table To set the Sub table use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Multi Xpt Assign menu press Sub Table Assign The Sub Table Assign menu appears The status area shows a list of the sub table assignments Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 2 m the lt Sub Table Select group select the sub table you want to set 3 Using any of the following methods select the cross point button for which you want to make an assignment e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting 1 Sub Button No Sub cross point button selection 1 1 to 128 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values e To disable operation of a button number press Inhibit 4 Turn the knob to select the main cross point button number to be assigned 3 Main Source No Main cross point button selection 1 to 128 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values To select a cross point button number while checking which sources can be selected In place of steps 3 and 4 in the above procedure you can use the following procedure for the setting 1 Press Source Select The Source Select menu appears In the upper part of the status area the selected Sub and Main button numbers and the current
215. lear all of the parameters in the working buffer and initialize the DME system press the CLR WORK BUFR button twice in rapid succession It is necessary to do this for both the local coordinate space and global coordinate space As the initial DME state you can specify whether to use the factory default settings or user settings in the Setup menu See Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu page 199 Graphics Display You can display graphics such as a wire frame coordinate axis and a grid over the current DME image This makes it easier to set up transformations because you can operate while viewing the coordinate axes and the position of the image in three dimensional coordinate space For the types of graphics displayed see Graphics Display in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 19 suones do WA 11 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 Use the DME menu to make graphics display settings You can make separate settings for separate channels To select a target DME channel use the device control block Displaying graphics Use the follovving procedure 1 In the menu control block select the top menu selection button DME The DME menu appears 2 Select VF6 Input Output and HF4 Graphic The Graphic menu appears 3 Turn the Graphic button on The system enters graphics display mode enabling graphics to be displayed in the monitor screen
216. lt To clear a region assignment Use the following procedure 1 In the 10 Key Region Assign menu press the indication for the button to which the region is assigned The button you pressed turns to reverse video Press Clear This clears the assignment of the selected button which is now no longer assigned Setting program button assignment You can change the assignment of some of the buttons in a standard type transition control block for use in VTR operations Use the following procedure 1 2 In the Panel gt Config menu press Program Button The Program Button menu appears Press Transition Module The Transition Module menu appears Using any of the following methods select the bank e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 211 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Bank Bank selection 1to4 4 Select the assignment for the PTN LIMIT LIMIT SET and KF buttons in the standard type transition control block from the lt PTN LIMIT LIMIT SET KF Button Assign gt group Ptn Limit KF These are used as the PTN LIMIT button LIMIT SET button and KF button Play Stop Cue These are used as the PLAY button STOP button and
217. lume 1 Recalling a register see page 115 To create a new effect recall an empty register to edit an effect open the register containing it Specifying the region and edit points see page 118 Select the region in which editing applies and set the edit points Creating and editing keyframes see page 120 Create the keyframes that make up the effect using operations to create insert modify or delete keyframes Time settings see page 133 Set the overall duration of the effect or the duration of each keyframe Path setting see page 136 Set the type of interpolation used between successive keyframes Executing effects see page 140 This provides a smooth effect based on the time and path settings Saving effects see page 143 Save a completed effect in a register Sequence of Keyframe Operations 111 spay 8 soy g 101064 Displaying the Timeline Menu By displaying the Timeline menu you can view keyframe effects on the timeline for each region and the associated information Recalling the Timeline menu To recall the Timeline menu use the following procedure 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button KEYFRAME 2 Select HF1 Time Line The Time Line menu appears Interpreting the Timeline Menu The following are the ma
218. ly assigned video and key signal names appear In the lower part a list of the assignable signals appears 2 Referring to steps 3 and 4 select the signal to be assigned Setting the cross point button shift operation You can set the operation of the rightmost button in each row of cross point buttons excluding the reentry buttons In the lt Xpt Shift Mode gt group of the Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Multi Xpt Assign menu select one of the following for each cross point table Hold Acts as a shift button and the shifted version of the cross point buttons is enabled while the button is held down Lock Acts as a shift button and pressing the button toggles between the shifted version and the unshifted version Off Acts as a cross point button in a 16 button system as button number 16 in a 24 button system as button number 24 and in a 32 button system as button number 32 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 215 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 sa deyD Setting the action of the SHIFT button in the cross point control block m the lt Shift Mode gt group of the Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Multi Xpt Assign menu select either of the following Display Functions as a shift button dedicated to the source name displays Shift All Bus Functions as a shift button for all buses e It is not possible to make this setting separately for individual switcher banks e Shift All Bus is o
219. me in the range that depends on the signal format as follows 00 00 to 59 nn where nn number of frames per second 1 5 Press Enter The set start point stop point or start delay time is reflected in the status area Clearing the start point stop point and start delay time settings in a menu In the Device menu use the following procedure 1 In the Device menu press VF3 VTR and HF1 Cueup amp Play 2 Using any of the following methods select the device for which you want to clear the settings e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 1 Dev Device number 1 to 12 3 Carry out any of the following operations as required e To clear the start point in the lt Start TC gt group press Clear e To clear the stop point in the lt Stop TC gt group press Clear e To clear the start delay time in the lt Delay gt group press Clear This clears the setting of the start point stop point or start delay time 100 Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders VTR Disk Recorder Timeline VVhen executing a VTR disk recorder timeline using a disk recorder note the follovving points e When carrying out keyframe settings be sure to recall the file for operation first e Set the keyframe duration to at least 30 frames If the du
220. ment Setting values 1 Port No Serial port 1 to 30 Setup Relating to DCU Press Port Setting The DCU gt Serial Port Assign gt DDR SD9P Setting menu appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name SCU number and disk recorder type appear In the lower part of the status area the response speed settings appear Using any of the following methods specify the item to which the response speed setting applies e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Item selection 1 to 42 a 1 Maximum Open Delay maximum time required to open a file 2 Maximum Cueup Delay maximum time required to cue up a file 3 Play After Cueup Delay maximum delay time from the cued up state to begin playback 4 Play After Open Next Delay maximum delay time from the Open Next state to begin playback Turn the knob to set the disk recorder response speed Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Setting Response speed setting 0 to 255 Press Set This confirms the setting Repeat steps 4 to 6 as required to make the settings for other items Setup Relating to DCU 277 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 278 Setup Relati
221. mes page 120 To set an action in the menu Use the following procedure 1 In the Device menu press VF3 VTR and HF2 Timeline The Device gt VTR DDR gt Timeline menu appears The status area shows two lists The upper list shows the device name register number keyframe number and action type start point stop point and variable speed set for the keyframe The lower list is used for setting the action for the device selected above and shows the port name current time status information start point stop point variable speed and file name for a disk recorder Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 2 Using any of the following methods select the device for which you want to set the action e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 1 Dev Device number 1 to 12 If using a disk recorder in the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu recall the file For details of settings required to recall a file see Sharing disk recorder file lists page 227 There is a limit of eight disk recorder files that can set on a single timeline When not using a disk recorder skip to step 4 In the lt Action gt group select the action Cueup Output a command to cue up to the currently displayed start point Start Output a Play command When
222. n a rewind is executed page 229 Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders SadlAeq eux Z 108 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 1084 Disk Recorder File Operations To carry out disk recorder file operations use the Device menu Refreshing recalling the disk recorder file list Use the follovving procedure 1 m the Device menu press VF3 VTR and HF3 File List The Device gt VTR DDR gt File List menu appears In the status area two lists appear The upper list shows the selected device name and the currently selected file name and set file name The lower list shows a list of files for the selected device the device appearing in the upper list In this list is shown the file name set when the material was recorded on the disk recorder the length of the file data timecode value and the file update information 2 Select the device for which you want to recall the file list using the knob Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 1 Dev Device number 1 to 12 3 Press the File List Update button This starts the process of recalling the file list and a message box appears showing the total number of files and the number recalled so far E g 101 5000 When the file list recall is completed the message box disappears To cancel recalling the file list During the recall press the Cancel button in the message box File list sharing You can share the recalled fil
223. n effect in a specified register Specify the register using the numeric keypad control block Use the follovving procedure 1 2 Press the TEFF button turning it on This allocates the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations Press the region selection button corresponding to the region for vvhich you vvant to save the register turning it on See step 2 page 116 of Recalling a register Press the STORE button turning it on VVith the numeric keypad enter the number of the register in vvhich you vvant to save the effect To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the button again To search for an empty register in the 100 range press 1 0 0 L1 period in this order Similarly to search for an empty register in the 200 range press 2 0 0 period The register number appears in the display If the number is followed by a letter e or E this indicates the following e The selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 2 E The selected register is empty for all selectable regions To add an attribute effect dissolve press the EFF DISS button turning it on For details of attributes see Effect Attributes in Chapter I Volume 1 Saving Effects 143 spay sajdeyo 910
224. n for the item that you want to change 2 Turn knob to change the Hue path type The path type indications shown in the menu represent the change in hue as seen on a Vectorscope CW Rotate clockwise CCW Rotate counterclockwise Short The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter Long The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is longer Changing the path type for Xpt 1 Press the Xpt path type indication for the item that you want to change A path selection window appears Path Setting 2 Press the indication for the desired path type to select it Xpt Hold off VVhen replaying a keyframe change the inputs to the settings saved in memory Xpt Hold on VVhen replaying a keyframe do not change the inputs Path Setting 139 spay 8 soy g 121064 140 Executing Effects By means of the RUN button in the keyframe control block you can play an effect as a continuously varying image This is referred to as effect execution See also Effect Execution in Chapter 1 Volume 1 It is also possible to execute an effect from the device control block see Chapter 2 Volume 1 Execution With the RUN Button Auto Mode Effect execution section TURN EI h y ea auto COPY PASTE V SHIFT INS
225. n router mode these settings are not used R SET ROUTE Since when using the simple connection the switcher and routing switcher cannot be connected in cascade no route setting is required and this is unset O SET AVAILABLE SOURCE DESTINATION Set the source and destination ranges so that the DVS 9000 inputs and outputs can be selected Y SET DISPLAY MODES The DISPLAY MODES PANEL FUNCTION setting is set to NORMAL The TALLY GROUP setting is set to be the same as the setting in Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Tally Group on the MVS Z SET PANEL STATUS The various settings are the same as the factory default settings Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel 291 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes 91 3210240 292 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel Chapter 17 Files Operations on Individual Files 294 Displaying the Individual Menus 5222 294 Viewing Detailed File 2222 294 SelEChN SIRE eer eee eee ene sens eee ee eee ee 296 Selecting a Device for 5 6222 2222 296 erat SOYU 297 298 299 300 DE a 300 File Batchi PCLALIONSsc cccscccossccosssccsecencccocssosesscccs
226. n the lt Snapshot Effect Display gt group For details see Chapter 5 Wipes Volume 1 Chapter 6 DME Wipes Volume 1 Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects Volume 2 and Chapter 14 Snapshots Volume 2 Setting the button operation mode Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Operation menu press Custom Button The Custom Button menu appears The status area shows a list of the items with their settings 230 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 2 Make the follovving settings as required Operation mode of the ALL button in the transition control block To specify the next transition to be selected by pressing the ALL button in the transition control block press the next transition you want to select turning it on in the lt Next Trans All gt group If everything here is set to OFF then pressing the ALL button does not change the specification of the next transition Operation mode during an auto transition For the operation mode when the AUTO TRANS TAKE or FTB button is pressed once more during an auto transition select Continue or Cancel in the lt Auto Trans Take gt group Continue Continue the auto transition Cancel Cancel the auto transition and return to the state before starting the auto transition Operation mode during keyframe execution For the operation mode when the RUN button is pressed once more during effect execution select Continue or Can
227. n the status area Carrying out level settings To set the low level and high level first set the trigger type to Level then use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Device Interface menu select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Signal format screen 1 to aspect ratio selection 3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level press H Set To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low press L Set This confirms the setting which appears in the status area Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel Making control panel GPI output settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Device Interface menu press GPI Output The GPI Output menu appears Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Port No Port selection 1108 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger polarity
228. nd the register number last recalled on the bank 3 Use any of the following methods to select the bank for saving the snapshot On a simple type Flexi Pad control block there are no banks and this operation is not necessary To select bank 0 Press the BANK 0 button To select bank 1 Press the BANK 1 button To select any bank from 0 to 9 Press the BANK SEL button changing the memory recall section display as shown below select a number from 0 to 9 The selected bank number appears in the numeric display The buttons in the memory recall section change to show the names of the registers in the selected bank together with the register status Using the Setup menu it is possible to specify which to display the register name or register number Lit orange Register containing a snapshot Lit yellow Last recalled register 166 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block Not lit Register not containing anything 4 To apply an attribute hold down the SNAPSHOT button and in the memory recall section press a button as follows turning it on Attribute to apply Button Effect dissolve EFF DISS button Auto transition AUTO TRANS button For details of attributes and available attributes see Snapshot Attributes in Chapter 1 Volume 1 In the Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to apply the cro
229. nd then press the desired button in the background A or B row 322 Macro Attachment Assigning PRE MCRO button POST MCRO button SHIFT JOOU JOUY BESTII 2 bess be 1 k i SHIFT Le Background B row MCRO ATTCH ENBL button Background A row The cross point button you pressed flashes amber and the register you recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button If you make both pre macro and post macro settings for the same button The later setting is valid To make a macro attachment setting in macro only mode To carry out this operation it is first necessary to assign the Macro Only Set function to one of the user preference buttons in the menu control block Carry out this assignment in the Eng Setup gt Panel gt Prefs Utility menu For details see Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu page 218 To make a macro attachment in Macro Only mode use the following procedure 1 Recall the macro register you want to assign to the button For details of recall from the numeric keypad control block see page 311 For details of recall from the Flexi Pad control block see page 317 Macro Attachment Assigning 323 soey 81 6 soley 81 131deyo 324 2 Press the user pre
230. nformation In the following the settings for DME1 are explained It is not necessary to make settings for DME2 Setting the initial crop Use the following procedure 1 In the 1 lt Aspect gt group select the screen aspect ratio 16 9 or 4 3 2 In the DME1 lt Crop gt group press Initial Crop and adjust the following parameters If you selected 4 3 in step 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Position of top side 3 00 to 3 00 2 Left Position of left side 4 00 to 4 00 3 Right Position of right side 4 00 to 4 00 4 Bottom Position of bottom side 3 00 to 3 00 If you selected 16 9 in step 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Position of top side 9 00 to 9 00 2 Left Position of left side 16 00 to 16 00 3 Right Position of right side 16 00 to 16 00 4 Bottom Position of bottom side 9 00 to 9 00 To return the parameter values to their default values Press Unity in the lt Crop gt group Setup Relating to DME Setting an illegal color limit for matte signals To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the DME internal matte generator press Matte Illeg Col Limit for DME in the DME gt Input menu turning it on Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu To carry out setup relating to DME connections with external devices display the DME gt Device Interface me
231. ng Setup menu select VF1 System and HF3 Format After changing any of the following settings be sure to press Execute to save the new values If you want to cancel the setting changes without saving them press Clear Note that since the Execute button is in the System gt Format menu when you make settings in a submenu it is essential to remember to return to the System gt Format menu and press the Execute button to save Setting the signal format Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Frame Field Rate gt group of the System gt Format menu select the system operating frequency For more details see System Setup in Chapter 1 Volume 1 2 Press the Active Line Aspect The Active Line Aspect menu appears The status area shows the number of active scan lines and screen aspect ratio for the switcher and connected DME s Setup for the Whole System 3 In the lt Active Line gt group select the number of active scan lines Setting the screen aspect ratio Use the following procedure 1 In the System gt Format gt Active Line Aspect menu select one of the following from the lt Screen Aspect gt group 16 9 4 3 e Independ Set the screen aspect ratio separately for M E P P and USER on the switcher and for each channel independently on the DME 2 If you selected Independ in step 1 select from the following Switcher Aspect Make the setting for the switcher DME Aspect Mak
232. ng to Router Interface and Tally Router Interface Settings Router Menu In this system the interface with a router routing switcher uses the S Bus protocol It is therefore necessary to assign inputs and outputs of the switcher and so on to an S Bus space To carry out this assignment use the Router Tally gt Router menu The assignment is common to the parallel and serial tallies To display the Router menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF1 Router The status area shows the device names to be assigned to the S Bus space the matrix size source address destination address and level Assigning switcher inputs and outputs to S Bus space Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Device gt group of the Router Tally gt Router menu select the device to which the settings apply SWRI Settings apply to switcher 1 SVVR2 Settings apply to switcher 2 When there are two switchers on the same network the SWR2 second switcher settings are required If there is only one switcher the settings are not required 2 In the lt Matrix Size gt group select the matrix size Standard 136 x 138 Assign the switcher S Bus space at full size You can assign all switcher inputs and outputs to the S Bus space but this causes some waste of S Bus space Compact 128 x 128 Assign the switcher S Bus space at compact size It is not possible to assign all switcher inputs and outputs to the S Bus
233. nly valid when the cross point button shift operation see previous item is set to Lock or Off Exporting source names and destination names To send the source names and destination names to the S Bus use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt XPT Assign menu press Name Export The Name Export menu appears 2 Turn the knob to set the station ID Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Station ID Station ID setting 1 to 255 3 a If set to 255 the information is sent to all stations 3 Press Src Name Export This exports the source names to the station selected in step 2 4 Press Dest Name Export This exports the destination names to the station selected in step 2 Since destination names cannot be selected freely fixed names are used AUX Delegation Buttons Settings Aux Assign Menu To carry out the settings of the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus control block use the Panel gt Aux Assign menu 216 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel To display the Aux Assign menu m the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF3 Aux Assign The left side of the status area shovvs the delegation numbers and the list of buses set the right side shovvs a list of buses that can be assigned Assigning a bus to an AUX delegation button Use the follovving procedure 1 Using any of the follovving methods select the delegation but
234. nterface 222 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel Making control panel GPI input settings Use the follovving procedure 1 In the Panel gt Device Interface menu press GPI Input The GPI Input menu appears Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Port Parameter Adjustment Setting values Port selection 1108 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger type Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input pulse X_ Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal To Level Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or high No Operation Apply no trigger on an input pulse In the lt Target gt group select the action block M F 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P Set the action for one of the operating banks Common Setup Set an action for something other than the above or a setup action Using any of the following methods select the action to be set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Action Action selec
235. nts Path Setting sicsssscccsscsvecccesvescesssvsoagssissossessessesencessssdesvassessessved sencnsssedsagcesesenses 136 Basic Procedure for Path Settings 5222 136 Executing Effects 140 Execution With the RUN Button Auto 2222 140 Run Mode Settings nisasie nero a 141 SAVING Effects 143 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 145 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block nasen 145 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu 147 Register Operations in the Menus 150 eden ara iene 150 Effect Status Display rsen ei ooien o 151 Effect Register 4 151 Chapter 14 Snapshots Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 158 Saving and Recalling 8 5 56 159 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 164 Banks and 5 5 165 Saving and Recalling 8 5 6 22 166 Snapshot Operations in the 222 170 Setting Snapshot Attributes 170 Snapshot Stat
236. nu To carry out system date and time settings and memory card formatting use the System gt Maintenance menu To display the Maintenance menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF1 System and HF7 Maintenance In the status area the current date and time and details of the memory card appear Setting the date and time For system date and time settings use the following procedure 1 With the knobs adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Hour Hour 0 to 23 2 Min Minute 0 to 59 3 Sec Second 0 to 59 6 Month Month 1 to 12 7 Day Day 1 to 31 8 Year Year 2000 to 2037 The set date and time appears in the Set box in the status area 2 Press the Set Date Time button This sets the current time to the date and time set in step 1 and the setting in the Current box of the status area changes accordingly Formatting a memory card To format a memory card use the following procedure Setup for the Whole System 203 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 Format a memory card before using it for the first time 1 Insert the memory card in the memory card slot 2 m the System gt Maintenance menu using any of the following methods select the USB device e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor 3 In the lt USB St
237. nu To display the Device Interface menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF4 DME and HF4 Device Interface In the following the settings for DME1 are explained It is not necessary to make settings for DME2 Setting the editor protocol In the 1 Editor Protocol gt group of the DME gt Device Interface menu press the following buttons to make the setting DME Control by DME protocol through the editor port VTR Control by VTR protocol through the editor port Making DME GPI input settings Use the following procedure 1 In the DME gt Device Interface menu press DME1 GPI Input The DME1 GPI Input menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Port Input port selection 1 to 8 2 No Selection of number for action to 1 to 8 be assigned Setup Relating to DME 261 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 sajdeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 3 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger polarity Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input pulse X_ Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal Level Carry out the specified operation wh
238. o to cancel the deletion Write Protecting a Directory To write protect a directory use the following procedure Directory Operations 307 s lli 21 seldeyo s li 21 sa deyo 308 1 In the device selection pull down menu select HDD or Memory Card See page 296 2 Using any of the following methods select the directory e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List Directory selection 1 to 3 Press Protect This protects the specified directory and this write protect status is reflected in the status area Directory Operations Chapter 18 Macros Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 310 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 311 Creating and Editing a Macron te ee 312 85850 314 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 316 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 317 Creatingrandisavinceal Macro 318 Macro Attachment 2222 322 Setting and Canceling a Macro Afttachment 322 Executing a Macro by Macro 2 325 soley 81 1080 Macro Operations
239. o automatically turn this button off disabling keyframe editing turn Edit Enable Auto Off on Automatic first keyframe insertion When an empty register is recalled to automatically insert a first keyframe of the state at that point turn 152 KF Auto Insert on Automatic effect saving To automatically save an effected when it is recalled after being edited turn Effect Auto Save on Keyframe duration default value Press Default KF Duration then enter the default value from the numeric keypad window Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is executed For P Bus GPI and DDR VTR timeline operations to execute the first keyframe when a rewind is carried out set each external device on in the lt REWIND amp Ist KF gt group When an effect is executed by pressing the RUN button with this setting on the first keyframe action is not executed GPI setting for the GPI timeline P Bus setting for the P Bus timeline DDR VTR setting for the VTR disk recorder timeline Setting the Source and Destination names To set the Source and Destination names used in the control panel use the following procedure 1 In the lt Source Dest Name gt group of the Panel gt Operation menu select the names to be used from the following SW er Local Source names set in the Xpt Assign menu and fixed bus names S Bus Descript Description names set in the routing switcher S Bus Type No Type No set in the routing switcher In
240. o select Memory Card It is not possible to select a directory Using any of the following methods select the data you want to export from the list on the left e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List L Register selection 1 to Press Export This adds the image data from the frame memory in a different format on the memory card If the specified destination file name already exists an overwriting confirmation message appears e Select Yes to overwrite the data e Select No to cancel the whole file export operation Importing and Exporting Files 305 s li 21 seldeyo s li 21 086 Directory Operations You can create a nevv directory on hard disk or memory card rename delete or vvrite protect a directory To carry out these operations use the File gt Configure gt Directory menu Displaying the Directory Menu In the File menu select VF7 Configure and HF1 Directory The Directory menu appears Creating a New Directory To create a new directory use the following procedure 1 In the device selection pull down menu select HDD or Memory Card See page 296 2 Press New The keyboard window appears See Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 3 Enter
241. o the PGM PST from the lt Logical M E to Physical P P gt group P P assign the physical PGM PST as logical PGM PST M E 1 assign the physical PGM PST as logical M E 1 M E 2 assign the physical PGM PST as logical M E 2 M E 3 assign the physical PGM PST as logical M E 3 Signal Input Settings Input Menu For setup relating to signal inputs use the Switcher gt Input menu To display the Input menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF3 Switcher and HF2 Input The status area shows source numbers and source names input signal phase and through mode on off setting Making phase adjustment and through mode settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Input menu select the input signal to which the settings apply e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Src No Input signal selection 1 to 80 The selected input signal appears in reverse video 2 Press Input Phase Adj 3 To adjust the phase adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Phase Input signal phase 16 to 16 Setup Relating to Svvitcher Processor 239 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 4 To enable through mode press TThrough Model turning
242. occncscessorenescceseateccesees 302 Displaying the Batch Operation Menu 222 302 Batch Savino 302 BatchRecall np P les 0000000000 303 029 303 Importing and Exporting Ffiles 304 Displaying the Import Export 2222 304 Importing Frame Memory 52 2222 304 Exporting Frame Memory 2222 305 306 Displaying the Directory 306 se 306 Renamin peal Directory mews E A 306 DeletingeaDirectony erste esses 307 Winite Brotecuin seal Dine ClOGyzesmemar teen 0 307 s lli 21 4a deyo Operations on ndividual Files You can save or recall the contents of an individual file or register Carry out these operations in the File menu Displaying the Individual Menus Use the following procedure 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button FILE 2 Depending on the type of file to be manipulated select the following VF and HF combination Button HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 VF1 Setup Initial Status Key Memory Video Proc Memory VF2 Effect 1 99 E
243. of the register in which to save the settings When overwriting the settings in the register recalled in step 3 continue to step 11 without changing the displayed register number 1 2 Press the ENTER button This saves the settings in the register Automatically cueing up and playing VTR disk recorder By recalling a register in which you have saved setting data for Cueup amp Play you can control the VTR disk recorder automatically in the same way as when automatically executing a keyframe effect Use the following procedure 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the EFF button turning it on Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders The RCALL button in the numeric keypad control block lights With the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block select the region You can also select more than one button Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons Press the REWIND button in the keyframe control block The VTR disk recorder automatically advances to the timecode value set as the start point While the VTR disk recorder is operating the ALL STOP button in the device control block flashes amber and when the start point is reached lights green If the operating VTR disk recorder is selected as the reference region in the device control block the CUE button also flashes and lights in the same way as the ALL STOP button Also when the start point is reach
244. oll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Bank M E or P P selection to which settings apply 1 to 4 The selected bank appears in reverse video Setting the transition preview mode To select the transition preview mode in the lt Transition Preview gt group of the Transition menu select any of the following One Time The transition preview ends after a single transition Normal Switching the TRANS PVW button on or off switches between the transition preview mode and the normal mode Setup Relating to Switcher Processor Selecting the transition mode of the independent key transition control block To select the key transition mode select any of the following in the Key Transition gt group of the Transition menu Same The transition settings for the On and Off directions are the same Independ The transition settings for the On and Off directions can be set separately Selecting the background transition flip flop mode In the Transition menu press Bus Toggle to switch between on and off On Flip flop mode Off Bus fixed mode For more details see Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Setting the split fader to be enabled or disabled In the Transition menu press Split Fader to switch between Enable and Disable This setting is only valid when using a simple transition module with Bus Toggle
245. ollovving control blocks This section describes the various methods of operation e Numeric keypad control block see page 186 e Flexi Pad control block see page 187 e Utility shotbox control block see page 189 Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control Block STORE STATS button UNDO button SHOTBOX button Display 000000000000 Region selection buttons RCALL button STORE button Numeric keypad control block To carry out shotbox execution in the numeric keypad control block use the following procedure 186 Shotbox Execution In the numeric keypad control block press the SHOTBOX button turning it on e This allocates the numeric keypad control block to shotbox operations e The RCALL button lights amber e The display shows the last recalled register number With the numeric keypad buttons enter the desired register number e The display now shows the entered register number e If the specified register is empty an E automatically appears after the register number Press the ENTER button This runs the specified shotbox register The number of the recalled register appears in the display The region selection buttons corresponding to the regions for which the effect is set light If auto run is set for the spec
246. ollowing procedure 1 In the lt Freeze gt group press Film turning it on The Film freeze is enabled You can adjust the ratio of frame advancement 2 Set the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Film Adjustment Ratio of frame advance Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Nonlinear Effect Settings You can add a variety of effects including effects that change the shape of the image as a whole Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF4 Non Linear and HF1 Type A menu for selecting the various effects appears 2 Display the menu for the effect that you want to apply by pressing its button The effect displayed is enabled 3 Make the settings for the selected effect The following nonlinear effects are available DME Special Effect Operations 37 suones do AWG 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 38 Name Effect See Wave Produces a wave like effect in the image page 39 Mosaic Glass Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified page 43 interval Flag Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind page 44 Twist Twists the image page 44 Ripple Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image page 45 Rings Partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving page 49 in the same direction Broken Glass Partitions the image like broken glass
247. ons on Individual Files As an example to select a memory card use the follovving procedure 1 In the File menu press the device selection indication above the file list default is HDD hard disk If Memory Card appears then since the memory card is already selected steps 1 and 2 are not necessary A pull down menu appears Press Memory Card This selects the memory card as the location holding the files To select a directory in the device selection area press SYSTEM default setting If there are any directories on the memory card a pull down menu appears To create a new directory see Creating a New Directory page 306 Press the name of the directory you want to use This selects the specified directory on the memory card to be manipulated Saving Files As an example to save snapshot register data to hard disk or memory card use the following procedure 1 2 3 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot In the device selection area on the left select Register In the device selection area on the right select HDD or Memory Card then select a directory See Selecting a Device for Operations page 296 Using any of the following methods select the data to be saved and the file in which to save it e To select all files within the list press All below the list e To select multiple files turn the knobs to select in the following
248. operation is enabled Interchanging the operating bank order or disabling operation Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Config menu select the Bank you want to set using either of the following methods e Press directly on the status area display e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Bank Select the position of the operating bank 11 to 4 you vvant to set The Bank selection here indicates the physical position on the control panel numbering from the top as the Ist Row 2nd Row 3rd Row and 4th Row 2 Select the operating bank that you want to assign to the selected Bank number in the lt M E Assign gt group The status area shows the interchanged state of the operating banks It is not possible to assign the same M E logical bank to more than one physical bank Be sure to make different M E assignments Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 205 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 sajdeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 3 For the selected Bank number in the lt M E Operation gt group select one of the following Enable Enable panel display and operation of the operating bank Disable Enable only panel display and disable operation of the operating bank Inhibit Disable both the panel display and operation of the operating bank Assigning the key delegation in the
249. orage Device gt group press Format A confirmation message appears 4 To carry out the formatting press OK This formats the memory card Carrying out the primary setting To specify a USB device with a storage device connected as a primary device use the following procedure Without this setting you cannot use the Memory Card item in the File menu to access a memory card on a storage device connected to the USB device 1 In the System gt Maintenance menu using any of the following methods select the USB device you want to set as primary e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor 2 In the lt USB Storage Device gt group press Set Primary Reloading a USB driver To reload a USB driver in the System gt Maintenance menu press Reload USB Driver If even after this operation the memory card is not recognized remove the memory card and reinsert it then try again 204 Setup for the Whole System Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu To carry out the overall control panel settings use the Panel gt Config menu To display the Config menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF1 Config The status area shows the Bank numbers 1 to 4 physical locations of the operating banks the allocated operating bank names and whether or not
250. ottom side 2 25 to 2 25 4 To soften the edges of the image press Edge Soft turning it on and set the following parameter Knob 1 Parameter Soft Adjustment Softness of edges Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 DME Special Effect Operations Edges cannot be softened vvhen the Crop effect is disabled Beveled Edge Settings This effect applies a beveled frame appearance to an image For sample images see DME Special Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Applying a beveled edge Use the following procedure 1 2 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF2 Beveled Edge The Beveled Edge menu appears Press Beveled Edge turning it on This enables the beveled edge and you can now use the knobs to adjust the edge width parameters When the border is enabled the edge soft function see page 26 is not available Set the parameters The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the aspect ratio 4 3 16 9 selected in the system as follows e 4 3 mode Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adiustment Setting values il H Simultaneously adjust width of left 0 00 to 4 00 and right edges 2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top 0 00 to 3 00 and bottom edges 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all Value of H shown four edges 16 9 mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left 1 0 00 to 4 00
251. pad control block press the EFF button turning it on The RCALL button in the numeric keypad control block lights 2 Press the P BUS button in the numeric keypad control block turning it on to select the P BUS region 3 Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons 4 Press the ENTER button in the numeric keypad control block This carries out the Recall Control of P BUS Devices Control of GPI Devices GPI Timeline Creation and Editing This section describes hovv to set GPI output ports to be registered at a keyframe point and how to carry out creation and editing of the GPI timeline For details of keyframe creation and editing operations see Creating and Editing Keyframes page 120 GPI output port settings Set the GPI output port number of the control panel or DCU which outputs GPI pulses at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline Use the following procedure Use the same procedure to subsequently change the settings 1 In the Device menu press VF1 GPI Timeline The Device gt GPI Timeline menu appears The status area shows the GPI Output list on the left and the GPI Port list on the right The GPI Output list on the left shows the relation between ports 1 to 8 for the GPI timeline and the trigger pulse output destination ports The content of this list is saved as keyframe data The GPI Port list on the right is fo
252. parate Side turning it on The Separate Sides effect is enabled If the video and key signals currently being output to the monitor are the front side you can select the front signals If they are the back side you can select the back signals Video and key signals are selected with the cross point control blocks of each M E bank or the PGM PST bank Invert Settings Inverts the input video signal and key signal horizontally or vertically You can make separate settings for the front and back 74 DME Special Effect Operations For an illustration of signal inversion see DME Special Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Applying the Invert effect Use the following procedure 1 2 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears In the lt Front gt group to invert front signals or the lt Back gt to invert back signals press the following buttons turning them on H Invert Invert video and key signals horizontally V Invert Invert video and key signals vertically Key Density Settings For the selected key you can separately set the key density Setting the key density Use the following procedure 1 2 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears Press Key Density turning it on This enables the key density function and you can now use the knobs to adjust the parameters
253. pe to select it OFF Executing the effect causes no change Step There is no interpolation between keyframes so that the effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed Linear Linear interpolation between keyframes resulting in constant speed movement S Curve The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and after a keyframe so that the rate of change is maximum midway between two keyframes Spline The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to the next Path Setting 137 s 2 yg g Ja deyo 910 2 g 4010640 138 The status area reflects the selected path type At this point depending on the setting for Curve the effect for Hue and Xpt is also affected as shovvn in the follovving table In the menu the Hue and Xpt settings do not change but the path type indication is dimmed out Curve setting Hue change Xpt change OFF Does not change Hold Step Changes as vvith the Step setting s not affected 4 If you selected Spline as the path type set the follovving parameters using the knobs Knob Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Tens Spline interpolation tension 4 00 to 4 00 Bias Spline interpolation bias 4 00 to 4 00 Cont Spline interpolation continuity 4 00 to 4 00 Changing the path type for Hue Use the following procedure 1 Press the Hue path type indicatio
254. play in the upper part of the list to display a selection window then select the region in the selection window Selecting multiple regions is also possible Operation between regions Operation between regions is possible in the following cases e Two of the M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and P P regions e Two of the USERT to 8 regions of the same configuration e Two of the DME to 4 including Global regions Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Register Operations in the Menus 4 Using any of the follovving methods select the desired registers e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Use the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 From Reg Copy source register number 1 to 99 2 To Reg Copy destination register number 1 to 99 3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99 e To select all registers press All To copy without transferring the name in the lt Copy gt group press W o Name turning it on In the lt Copy gt group press Copy This carries out the copy If for example the copy destination register is write protected or the same register is specified both as the copy source and destination registers a confirmation message appears Press OK to cancel the copy Merging effect registers Carry out the following procedure 1 In the Effect menu select VF2 E
255. plying the Lighting effect use the following procedure to set the bar shape of the shade area 1 Turn Shade Modify on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 X X value of bar center point 16 00 to 16 00 Width Width of bar 0 00 to 100 00 Soft Softness of edges 0 00 to 100 00 Setting the color of the shade in the shade area To set the color of the shade in the shade area use the following procedure 1 Turn Shade Color on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Trail Settings suones do JWA LL13 deyo This effect recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail of afterimages is created DME Special Effect Operations 67 suones do AWG 10840 For an illustrative figure and other information see DME Special Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 e The trail effect can be applied to two channels at the same time e Turning Trail on when Motion Decay or Keyframe Strobe is on turns it off automatically Applying the Trail effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF5 Light Trail and HF2 Trail The Trail menu appears 2 Press Trail turning it on The Trail effect is enabled You can adjust the parame
256. previous item Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro This assigns the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block to macro editing The MCRO button and STORE button in the numeric keypad control block and the EDIT ENBL button in the keyframe control block light red The AUTO INS button in the keyframe control block also lights and the auto insert function is enabled 2 Create an event carry out the control panel operation you want to save as an event in the macro For details of the events that can be created see Overview in Chapter 1 Volume 1 VVhen you carry out a control panel operation the event is automatically saved in the macro auto insert function You can also include a pause event in the macro For details of how to do this see Inserting a pause event page 314 During macro editing you can press a mode selection button in the numeric keypad control block other than the MCRO button for example the TRANS RATE button to record the executed operation as an event In this case the MCRO button remains lit red Even during macro editing you can carry out a keyframe operation with the fader lever in the keyframe control block and the following buttons EFF LOOP STOP NEXT NORM REV NORM REV FF REWIND and RUN Use the PAUSE button to insert a pause event The keyframe control block buttons other than the above do not operate 312 Ma
257. pshot Snapshot Snapshot Detail display area Operations on Individual Files 295 s li 21 sa deyo 296 3 Selecting a particular file displays more detailed information about that file in the detail display area at the top right of the file list Selecting Regions You can carry out a file operation on a number of regions simultaneously However a region selection is not required for the following files Key memory Video process memory Shotbox Macro Macro attachment Frame memory Setup Initial status In the above list for setup and initial status you can subdivide the files for manipulation by device using the same operation as for region selection To make a region selection Use the following procedure 1 Press the region selection display area at the top right of the screen see page 295 The region selection window appears 2 Press the region names you do not want to select turning them off 3 Press OK Selecting a Device for Operations To carry out file operations you need to specify the device holding the data or file as one of the following register hard disk memory card remote panel hard disk and so on You can then further select a directory e Files saved on the hard disk may be lost if the hard disk fails Always keep separate backup copies of important files on a memory card e Format a memory card see page 203 before using it for the first time Operati
258. put settings Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt GPI Output Assign menu using any of the following methods select what the setting applies to e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Setup Relating to DCU 1 No GPI output 1 to 50 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger polarity The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open circuit or drives the output high and holds this state for the specified pulse width The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted or drives the output low and holds this state for the specified pulse width _X_ Each time the trigger occurs the relay contacts are alternately closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level Turning the knobs select the pulse width and timing to be set Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 fields 4 Timing Output timing 1 to 32 a 1 Field 1 2 Field 2 3 Any When is selected as the trigger polarity there is no Pulse Width setting When Sta
259. r page 115 This simultaneously recalls M E 1 register 5 and M E 2 register 5 and the M E 1 and M E 2 region selection buttons light Press the region selection button MASTR turning it off Turn on only the button for the region you want to change here M E 1 and recall the desired register here Effect 10 This recalls M E 1 register 10 while on M E 2 register 5 remains selected Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 4 5 Press the buttons for the regions you want to save on the master timeline here M E 1 and M E 2 turning them on Press the region selection button MASTR turning it on The display shows the register number last used for master timeline operation Press the STORE button turning it on With the numeric keypad buttons enter the number of the register here 1 in which you want to save the master timeline and press the ENTER button This saves M E 1 register 10 and M E 2 register 5 in master timeline register 1 and the STORE button goes off At the same time the RCALL button lights Checking the regions saved on a master timeline For example in the course of amending a master timeline you can check which regions are saved in the register With the MASTR button in the numeric keypad control block lit hold down the STORE button While it is held down the buttons for the saved regions light When the button is released the state before it was held down is
260. r in the range 1 to 99 e To specify an endless loop enter 0 zero COUNT 15 7 Press the ENTER button to confirm the entry The start point end point and loop count that you have set are reflected in the Timeline menu If you enter the loop count as 0 endless loop the count is shown as inf infinity The numeric keypad control block display changes back to the state shown in step 4 Amending the keyframe loop settings To change the loop range or count for the currently recalled effect carry out the following procedure 1 When the KF LOOP button in the keyframe control block is lit amber press it turning it green The numeric keypad control block display shows the current loop range If for example the start point is keyframe 2 and the end point is keyframe 5 this appears as follows 2 To change the loop range press the CLEAR button in the numeric keypad control block Creating and Editing Keyframes 129 spay 194dey9 s 2 43 g Je deyo To change the loop count only press the ENTER button then skip to step 6 When you press the CLEAR button this appears as follows FM TO 3 Enter the keyframe number for the new start point and press the ENTER button 4 Enter the keyframe number for the new end point and press the ENTER button The display shows the currently set loop count 5 To change the setting press t
261. r movie and still images video freeze image In the lt Priority gt group select the way in which the images are overlaid Over the movie is on top and the still image is underneath Under the movie is underneath and the still image is on top Mix the movie and still images are mixed adjust the following parameter with the knob Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Mix amount of the still image with 0 00 to 100 00 2 respect to the movie a The 0 00 setting is the same as Over and the 100 00 is the same as Under Selecting the freeze timing In the lt KF Freeze Timing gt group select the timing for freezing the keyframe strobe 72 DME Special Effect Operations Frame freeze in frame units Field freeze in field units To erase the afterimage from memory each time a keyframe is passed Press KF Strobe Eraser turning it on When the effect passes a keyframe the afterimage is erased before writing a new afterimage Applying stardust to the afterimage portion The afterimage portion becomes stardust and gradually disappears 1 Press the DUST button turning it on Set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 KF Strobe Amount of the afterimage 0 00 to 100 00 Dust disappearing as stardust 3 2 Dust Soft Timing with which stardust 0 00 to 100 00 disappears 3 Dust Size Size of stardust 0 00 to 100 00 4 Dust Aspect Aspect ratio
262. r selecting the GPI trigger pulse output destination Using any of the following methods select the GPI timeline port you want to set on the GPI Timeline e Press directly on the list on the left of the status area e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 1 GPI Output No GPI timeline port number 1108 Using any of the follovving methods trigger output destination e Press directly on the list on the right of the status area Control of GPI Devices 91 S IA Q eux Z Jaydeyo S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 1084 e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Setting Setting values 2 GPI Port No SCU DCU GPI port to be the 1033 trigger output destination a 1 Off no specification 2 Control panel SCU GPI port 3 DCU GPI port If in step 3 you selected 2 SCU or 3 DCU then use the knob to select the port number The indication for knob 3 depends on whether SCU or DCU is selected Knob 1 Parameter Setting Setting values 3 SCU Port No SCU GPI port number 1 to 8 3 DCU Port No 1 DCU GPI port number 1 to 50 2 a The number of DCU GPI ports depends on the settings in Engineering Setup The setting is reflected in the list on the right of the status area Press Set This specifies the SCU DCU GPI port whose number you specified in step 4 as the pulse output destination for the GPI output port s
263. r snapshot wipe snapshot DME wipe snapshot and key snapshot registers e Lock Write protect the contents of the register e Copy Copy the contents of one register to another register e Move Move the contents of one register to another register e Swap Swap the contents of two registers e Delete Delete the contents of a register e Name Attach a name to a register For details of snapshot register operations see Effect Register Editing page 151 Snapshot Operations in the Menus 175 sjoysdeus p saydeyo s ousdeuS p 1 6 176 Snapshot Operations in the Menus Chapter 15 Utility Shotbox LEPAA DTE EELE E A r a s rs ri 178 Executing a Utility With the User Preference Buttons Menu ControlfB locks Memes 178 Executing a Utility in the Utility Shotbox Control Block 179 Shotbox Register 2 2222 181 Creating a Shotbox Register in the Numeric Keypad Control BOCK ae eee cet pera LU 181 Creating a Shotbox Register Using the Menus 183 Solbu xiHxecutiorirrrr6000 00000 186 Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 186 Shotbox Execution in the Flexi Pad Control Block 187 Shotbox Execution in the Utility Shotbox Control Block 189 Shotbox Register
264. rans SS Recall DSK1 SS Recall DSK2 SS Recall DSK3 SS Recall DSK4 SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind KF Reverse Run No Action When Target is Common Setup FM Src1 Field Freeze FM Srcl Frame Freeze FM Src2 Field Freeze FM Src2 Frame Freeze FM Srcl Freeze Off FM Src2 Freeze Off Userl to 8 SS Recall Userl to 8 EFF Recall Userl to 8 EFF Recall amp Run User to 8 KF Run Userl to 8 KF Stop Userl to 8 KF Rewind Userl to 8 KF Reverse Run No Action Action list when the trigger type is Level When Target is M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 or P P Aspect No Action When Target is Common Setup Format Aspect No Action b When knob 3 selection is Key Snapshot c When knob 3 selection is Snapshot or Effect 6 Press Action Set to confirm the action selection The selected setting appears in the status area Setup Relating to Switcher Processor dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo 255 dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 Carrying out level settings To set the low level and high level first set the trigger type to Level then use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Device Interface menu select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu appears Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video c
265. ration of the recorded video clip is less than the keyframe duration after playback to the end of the clip the remainder of the keyframe duration is filled with a still of the last frame of the clip see figure below Example When the recorded clip for keyframe 1 has a duration of 15 frames ____ 30 frames ya 30 frames gt 4 15 frames 4 15 frames gt A A A KF1 KF2 KF3 Interval for which clip is recorded Interval in which still frame is displayed In this example when keyframe 1 is executed the first 15 frames consist of clip playback and the remaining 15 frames show the 15th frame as a still image e From pressing the RUN button to the time when the effect actually starts execution may take around one second In order that pressing the RUN button after REWIND make the effect start execution as soon as possible set cueing up of the file for operation as rewind operation In the first keyframe 2 to be executed with RUN for the cued up file do not set the start point but set only the start command 1 If the setting when the REWIND button is pressed is for the first keyframe to be executed then the first keyframe is executed and otherwise the setting for the Rewind Action is carried out 2 If the setting when the REWIND button is pressed is for the first keyframe to be executed then the second keyframe is executed and otherwise the first ke
266. rectly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Setup Relating to DCU 1 No Signal format screen aspect ratio 1 to selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level press H Set To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low press L Set This confirms the setting which appears in the status area Parallel Output Settings Output Config Menu For the DCU parallel output ports after carrying out tally settings in the Router Tally gt Tally Enable menu you can assign GPI outputs to output ports that are still unused To assign DCU outputs to DCU parallel output ports display the DCU gt Output Config menu To display the Output Config menu In Engineering Setup select VF5 DCU and HF3 Output Config The status area shows output port information Assigning a GPI output port Use the following procedure 1 2 In the DCU gt Output Config menu select what the setting applies to DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group In the lt Parallel Output Assign gt group press GPI Output Using any of the following methods select the output port and GPI output number e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e T
267. ress Source Name A keyboard window appears Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 213 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 5 Enter any name of not more than 16 characters then press Enter For details of keyboard window operation see Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 To set the source name display color in the lt LCD Color gt group select the color Orange Green Y ellow Using multi cross point assign tables In addition to the normal assignment main table as cross point assign tables you can create up to four sub tables Sub1 to 5064 However you can only carry out assignment of the video and key combinations in the Main table You can select the table to be used for each of the following banks or buses e M E 1 to M E 3 banks and PGM PST bank e Buses assignable to AUX delegation buttons Use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Xpt Assign menu press Multi Xpt Assign The Multi Xpt Assign menu appears The status area shows the bank and bus names and the cross point assign table Using any of the following methods select the bank or bus e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Bank Bus Bank or bus selection 1 to 108 3 In the lt Xpt Tab
268. ro Attachment Assigning Executing a Macro by Macro Attachment To execute a macro by means of the macro attachment set for a button in the cross point control block of an M E bank or the PGM PST bank use the following procedure 1 In the cross point control block press the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button turning it on 2 Press the desired button for which a macro attachment has been set This recalls the macro register assigned to the button and the macro is executed as follows according to the operation mode Pre macro mode The macro is executed first and then the button function is executed Post macro mode The button function is executed first and then the macro is executed Macro only mode The button function is not executed and the macro only is executed During macro execution the button you pressed flashes It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time Therefore even if you simultaneously press multiple buttons for which macro attachments are set only one macro is executed During macro execution recalling the same register again stops the macro being executed Therefore pressing twice a button for which a macro attachment is set stops the macro being executed Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in setup If you change the settings in setup a saved macro may not have the expected effect During macro execution if you switch the control panel to macro ed
269. rol block By default the memory recall buttons in the utility shotbox control block are assigned to shotbox registers 1 to 96 in banks 1 to 4 see page 189 but in the setup menu you can assign these to any 96 actions To execute an assigned action Use the follovving procedure VVhen the action is to execute a shotbox register follovv the procedure in Shotbox Execution in the Utility Shotbox Control Block page 189 1 Press one of the bank selection buttons BANK1 to BANK4 to select a bank e The bank selection button you pressed lights amber e For the selected bank the memory recall buttons show the button numbers and corresponding button states If a button has been given a name in the setup menu this name appears Not lighted buttons with nothing saved Lit orange buttons holding a utility command or menu shortcut Utility Execution 179 xoqlous nn Si 4eldeyo xoqlous n S s ydeuo 180 2 Press the memory recall button for vvhich the action you vvant to execute has been registered e In the case of a function on off action the button you pressed lights green and this enables the function To disable the function press the button once more e For other actions the button you pressed momentarily lights green and then the function is executed Utility Execution Shotbox Register Creation The term shotbox refers to a function vvhereby for each specified region any snapshot or
270. row keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Action Action selection 1 to 2 5 Reg No Register number 1 to 45 a Action list when the trigger type is other than Status When Source is 1 2 or M E 3 1 SS Recall Key2 SS Recall Key3 SS Recall Key4 SS Recall No Action When Source is P P DSK1 SS Recall DSK2 SS Recall DSK3 SS Recall DSK When Source is Common KF Run No Action e Action list when the trigger type is Status When Source is M E 1 M E 2 or M E 3 Key1 SS Recall Key2 SS Recall Key3 When Source is P P DSK1 SS Recall DSK2 SS Recall DSK3 SS Recall DSK4 SS Recall 4 SS Recall No Action SS Recall Key4 SS Recall Keyl On Key2 On Key3 On Key4 On No Action DSK1 On DSK2 On DSK3 On DSK4 On No Action When Source is Common Error Make Error Break No Action b When knob 2 selection is Key Snapshot 7 Press Action Set to confirm the action selection The selected setting appears in the status area Test firing the trigger To test fire the trigger press Test Fire This outputs a trigger from the selected output port This is not output vvhen the trigger type is Status Setting the control mode for P BUS devices In the lt P Bus Control group of the Panel gt Device Interface menu select the mode Trigger When
271. rs depending on the selected modulation mode e When Shape is selected Knob 1 Parameter H Adjustment Ripple center point in horizontal direction Setting values 5 000 to 5 000 DME Special Effect Operations 47 suones do WA 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 Knob Parameter Adjustment Ripple center point in vertical direction Setting values 3 000 to 3 000 e When other than Shape is selected direction Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Ripple center point in 8 000 to 8 000 horizontal direction 2 V Ripple center point in vertical 1 6 000 to 6 000 To limit the ripple range 1 Press Range turning it on 2 Set the follovving parameters e When Radial or Shape mode is selected along radius Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size R Amount of ripple modulation 0 00 to 100 00 along radius 2 Offset R Center of modulation range 8 000 to 8 000 e When Angular mode is selected periphery Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size A Amount of ripple modulation along 0 00 to 100 00 periphery 2 Offset A Center of modulation range along 8 000 to 8 000 When Both mode is selected along periphery Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size R Amount of ripple modulation 0 00 to 100 00 along radius 2 Offset
272. rs corresponding to the selected bank Off Register in which nothing is saved Lit orange Register holding shotbox settings Lit yellow Last executed register Press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to the register you want to run e The selected shotbox register is executed e The pressed button lights yellow e The numeric display shows the bank number followed by the selected register number e If the selected shotbox register has auto run set on recall the effect is immediately executed When auto run is not set for the recalled register Simply recalling the register does not run the effect To do this press the RUN button Shotbox Execution in the Utility Shotbox Control Block Bank selection buttons Memory recall buttons Utility shotbox control block m the utility shotbox control block as the default setting the memory recall buttons have registers 1 to 96 allocated to banks 1 to 4 Bank Register allocation to memory recall buttons 1 1 to 24 2 25 to 48 3 49 to 72 4 73 to 96 For shotbox execution in the utility shotbox control block use the following procedure 1 Press one of the bank selection buttons BANK1 to BANK4 to select the bank e The pressed bank selection button lights amber e The memory recall buttons
273. rt address 1 to 1024 2 Copy From To Copy from source end address 1 to 1024 3 Specify the copy to source address Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Copy To From Copy to source start address 1 to 1024 4 Copy To To Copy to source end address 1 to 1024 4 Press Execute This makes the tally copy setting according to the specifications in steps 2 and 3 Modifying tally copy settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Router Tally gt Tally Copy menu press Modify The Modify menu appears Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 285 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 32140640 286 2 Use the knobs to select the copy source and copy destination Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Copy From 1 Copy from source 1 to 1024 2 Copy To Copy to source 1 to 1024 3 Press Execute This updates the tally copy settings Deleting tally copy settings Use the follovving procedure 1 m the Router Tally gt Tally Copy menu using either of the following methods select the tally copy whose settings you want to delete e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Copy No Tally copy setting selection for deletion 1to 2 Press Delete Thi
274. s Global Target Loc XYZ 200 1500 Value of X Value of Y Z 150 9999 Value of Z a This shows one of Local Target Local Source Global Target and Global Source b This shows one of Loc XYZ Loc Size Rot Spin Axis Loc Skew Asp and Pers Example three dimensional parameter display DME menu Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 17 suones do IWA 11 s deu LL 4010640 suones do AWA 18 Vievving the three dimensional parameter details In the DME menu press the menu title button the DME in the upper left part of the screen The Status menu appears This menu shows the three dimensional parameters for the DME reference channel currently selected in the device control block Page DME Effect 0 Free KF 4100 gt Status KF 0 0 00 00 00 00 Edge Local Size Aspect Skevv Video Modify Location Axis Location Rotation Source Spin Target Spin Perspective Target Loc Size Freeze Non Linear Global Size Light Trail Location Axis Location Rotation s Source Spin Input Output Target Spin Perspective Target Loc Size Example three dimensional parameter details Entering Three Dimensional Parameter Values In addition to setting three dimensional parameter values with the trackball and Z ring you can enter them directly from the numeric keypad control block Entering three dimensional parameter values Use
275. s 1 Bank M E or P P selection to which settings apply 1 to 4 The selected bank appears in reverse video Selecting the key memory mode In the lt Key Memory gt group of the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu select one from Full full mode Simple simple mode Off For more details see Key Memory in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Selecting the processing order of masks and borders In the lt Mask Border Process gt group of the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu select one of the following Mask gt Border Apply the mask effect then apply the border effect Border gt Mask Apply the border effect then apply the mask effect Selecting the key priority operation mode In the lt Key Priority gt group of the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu select one of the following Normal The key priority sequence can be varied freely Fix Fixed at currently set priority sequence Setting the operation mode of the key bus XPT HOLD button In the lt Xpt Hold Mode gt group of the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu select any of the following Key Disable The XPT HOLD button of the key bus functions as a key disable button When the XPT HOLD button is on recalling a snapshot or keyframe effect does not reflect the key settings including the cross point selection information Xpt Hold The XPT HOLD button of the key bus functions as a cross point hold button When the XPT HOLD is on recalling a snapshot or keyframe effect doe
276. s All below the list e To select multiple files turn the knobs to select in the following ranges Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List L Select the first register into which the data 1 to 99 is to be recalled 2 List R Select the first file in which data is held 1 to 99 Num Number to be selected 1 to 99 e To select a single file press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor or press directly on the list in the status area Operations on Individual Files 5 Press Load This recalls the contents of the selected file from the specified location Copying Files You can copy files either within a directory or between directories on the hard disk memory card or remote panel As an example to copy a snapshot file from memory card to remote panel 1 use the following procedure 1 2 3 4 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot In the device selection area on the left specify the location of the file to be copied in this case Memory Card and a directory See page 296 In the device selection area on the right select the destination of the copied file in this case Remote PNL1 and a directory Using any of the following methods select the source and destination files e To select all files within the list press All below the list e To select multiple files turn the knobs to select in the following ranges
277. s Device Interface Menu 253 Setup Relating to 6 260 Settings Relating to Signal Inputs Input 2 260 Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu 261 Setup Relating to 265 Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs Input Config Menu 265 GPI Input Setting GPI Input Assign 2222 2222 266 Parallel Output Settings Output Config 5222 269 GPI Output Setting GPI Output Assign Menu 00 eee 270 Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign 5222 273 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 278 6 Table of Contents Router Interface Settings Router 62 278 Tally Group Settings Group Tally 5222 2222 280 Wiring Settings Wiring Menu 2 281 Tally Generation Settings Tally Enable Menu 5522 283 Tally Copy Settings Tally Copy 52 2222 2222 285 Parallel Tally Settings Parallel Tally 522 286 Serial Tally Settings Serial Tally 2 2222 2222 288 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel 290 Procedure for Simple 22 290 Setting Status of the
278. s as they move To apply the Flying Bar effect With the Flying Bars menu displayed use the following procedure 1 To make transition settings press Transition and set the following Adjustment Degree of transition Setting values 0 000 to 100 000 parameters Knob 1 Parameter 1 Transition 2 Random Degree of randomness in distance moved by each block 100 000 to 100 000 50 DME Special Effect Operations Knob 3 Parameter Angle Adjustment Direction of movement Setting values 8 000 to 8 000 2 To set the partition method press Partition and set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 VVidth VVidth of partition 0 000 to 100 000 2 Random Degree of randomness in partition 1 0 000 to 100 000 vvidth 3 Angle Partition angle 8 000 to 8 000 Blind settings The Blind effect divides the image into bars or vvedges vvith blocks rotating like the slats of venetian blinds To apply the Blind effect With the Blind menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the lt Mode gt group select Bar or Wedge 2 To make transition settings press Transition and set the following Adjustment Number of rotations of the blocks Setting values 8 000 to 8 000 parameters Knob Parameter 1 Rotation 2 Perspective Degree of randomness in distance moved by each
279. s the relay contacts are alternately closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the output Turn the knobs to select the pulse width and timing to be set Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 fields 4 Timing Output timing 1032 a 1 Field 1 2 Field 2 3 Any When gt C is selected as the trigger polarity there is no Pulse Width setting VVhen Status is selected there is no Pulse VVidth or Timing setting In the lt Source gt group select the action block M E 1 to M E 3 and P P Set an action for the M E or PGM PST bank Common Set an action for error status Using any of the following methods select the action to be set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 2 Action Action selection 1102 2 5 Reg No Register number 1 to 45 1 to 99 a Action list when the trigger type is other than Status VVhen Source is M E 1 M E 2 or M E 3 Cut Auto Trans Keyl Cut Keyl Auto Trans Key2 Cut Key2 Auto Trans Key3 Cut Key3 Auto Trans Key4 Cut Key4 Auto
280. s deletes the selected tally copy entry Parallel Tally Settings Parallel Tally Menu For settings relating to parallel tally use the Router Tally gt Parallel Tally menu To display the Parallel Tally menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF6 Parallel Tally The status area shows the parallel tally settings Making or modifying parallel tally settings Use the following procedure Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally In the lt Device gt group of the Router Tally gt Parallel Tally menu select DCU1 or DCU2 Using any of the follovving methods select the slot number and port number e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Slot No Parallel tally slot number 2to6 2 Port No Parallel tally port number 1 to 54 Press Set The Set menu appears In the lt Source Destination gt group select the tally type Src Return a tally to all sources output to the destination Dest Return a tally to the destination outputting the source to which a source tally is returned Set the destination address and level The level setting is only required when in step 4 you selected Destination Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Address Destination address 1 to 1024 2 Level Destin
281. s in vertical direction Skew V Degree of skew in vertical direction 0 00 to 100 00 Width V Vertical width of partition 0 00 to 100 00 10 Angle Angle of partition line 8 000 to 8 000 To set the partition position Use the following procedure 1 Press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal partition position 5 000 to 5 000 2 Vertical partition position 5 000 to 5 000 Mirror settings The Mirror effect partitions the image vertically and horizontally creating an image like a reflection in a mirror DME Special Effect Operations suones do JWA 0840 54 To appiy the Mirror effect With the Mirror menu displayed press Left to Right Right to Left Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top to set the reflection method multiple selections possible Left to Right Reflect left side on right Right to Left Reflect right side on left Top to Bottom Reflect top side on bottom Bottom to Top Reflect bottom side on top Top to Left to Right s n g Bottom DME g DMA o 7 To set the position of the border betvveen original and reflection Use the following procedure 1 Press Position 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal border position 8 000 to 8 000 2 V Vertic
282. s not reflect the cross point selection information Setting the operation mode when the pattern limit is released In the lt Pattern Limit Transition gt group of the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu select either of the following operation modes Setup Relating to Switcher Processor Auto VVhen the pattern limit is released the remainder of the transition is carried out automatically at a special purpose transition rate Manual After the pattern limit is released the transition vvaits for the next operation then executes Until you move the fader lever or press TAUTO TRANSI the transition is not executed Setting the default vvipe edge softness Use the follovving procedure In the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu adjust the following parameter to set the default value Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Wipe Edge Default value of wipe edge softness 50 00 to 50 00 Soft Settings Relating to Function Links Link Menu Carry out setup relating to links by displaying the Switcher gt Link menu To display the Link menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF3 Switcher and HF6 Link The status area shows the current link information Setting a cross point button link To link together two buses internal to the switcher use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Link menu press Internal Bus Link The Internal Bus Link menu appears The status area shows the link source
283. s the current setting state of the selected link and a list of the selectable video names or button names together with the GPI link Enable Disable setting for each bus 4 Using any of the following methods select what the setting applies to For each GPI port there can be up to eight links e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 GPI Port GPI output port selection 1 to 8 2 Link No Link number selection 1108 3 Video Button No 1 Video or button name 1 to 136 3 selection a These include main pair numbers 1 to 128 and Cut and Auto Trans on each operating bank 5 In the lt Video Button gt group press Select The selected video or button name is reflected in the status area To clear a video button name link Make the selection to which the setting applies then in the lt Video Button gt group press Clear 6 To select for each bus whether the GPI link setting is enabled or disabled use any of the following methods to select the bus to which the setting applies e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection 252 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 4 Bus
284. setting operation for effect register saving In step 4 however press the EFF button lighting it green 1 1 Enter the shotbox register number specified in step 6 using the numeric keypad buttons 1 2 Press the ENTER button This saves the effect setting in a shotbox register and the STORE button goes off At the same time the RCALL button lights Shotbox Register Creation To change the contents of a shotbox register After recalling the shotbox register you vvant to change referring to the previous item Creating a shotbox register change the contents of the shotbox register and save To check the region saved in a shotbox register During operations to change the contents of a shotbox register to check which region is saved in the register use the following procedure 1 With the SHOTBOX button lit press the STORE button turning it on 2 Press the required button as follows turning it on To check the snapshot region SNAPSHOT button To check the effect region EFF button 3 Hold down the STORE button While this button is held down the button for the saved region lights Releasing the button returns you to the state before holding down the STORE button eg the STORE button is lit the mode selection buttons TRANS RATE button and so on in the numeric keypad control block do not operate To change the mode press the RCALL button or SHOTBOX button so that the STORE button go
285. show the names and states of the registers corresponding to the selected bank Off Register in which nothing is saved Shotbox Execution 189 xoqlous nn Si 4eldeyo xoqlous n Si s ydeuo 190 2 Shotbox Execution Lit orange Register holding shotbox settings Lit yellow Last recalled register Press the memory recall button to which the shotbox register you want to run is allocated The shotbox execution is carried out The pressed button lights yellow The numeric keypad control block SHOTBOX button lights and the region selection button corresponding to the region for which the effect is set also lights If the selected shotbox register has auto run set on recall the effect is immediately executed When auto run is not set for the recalled register Simply recalling the register does not run the effect To do this press the RUN button in the keyframe control block Shotbox Register Editing You can carry out the follovving editing on shotbox registers e Lock Write protect the contents of the register e Copy Copy data from one register to another e Move Move data from one register to another e Swap Swap the contents of two registers Delete Delete the contents of a register e Name Attach a name to a register The procedures for shotbox register editing are similar to the procedures described in Effect Register Editing page 151 Unlike in effect register editing how
286. sing any of the follovving methods set the serial port connected to the VTR for which you want to make the settings e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Port No Serial port 1 to 30 Press Port Setting The DCU gt Serial Port Assign gt VTR Setting menu appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name SCU number and timecode source appear In the lower part of the status area the VTR constants appear In the lt TC Source gt group select the timecode source reference signal for determining the tape position from the following LTC Longitudinal Time Code Normally LTC is used but when the tape speed is such that LTC cannot be read Ch normal speed or below or the LTC cannot be read for some other reason this is interpolated using CTL pulses or timer counter pulses CTL Control CTL pulses or timer counter pulses are used Use this only for a tape on which no timecode is recorded The displayed tape position is based on the reference signal specified here Using any of the following methods specify the VTR constants e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adj
287. sition Types in Chapter 1 Volume 1 4 If each time a transition ends the transition type is to return to the previous setting press One Time Enable Settings relating to fader lever operations To select the way in which the fader lever position and the transition progress are related use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Transition menu press Transition Curve The Transition Curve menu appears 2 In the lt Fader Curve gt group select the fader lever operation mode Normal The transition progress is linear according to the fader lever position Factory default setting Adv Tally Mode When the fader lever is moved from the end of its travel the tally is output slightly before the transition starts Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu For settings relating to keys wipes and frame memory use the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu To display the Key Wipe FM menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF3 Switcher and HF5 Key VVipe FM Setup Relating to Switcher Processor The status area shovvs the key memory settings mask and border processing order key priority cross point hold pattern limit transition and wipe edge settings for each operating bank Switching video process memory on or off In the Switcher gt Key Wipe FM menu press Video Proc Memory turning it on See also Switcher Setup in Chapter I Volume 1 Settings for
288. ss point hold or GPI output attributes In a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to apply any attributes To add these attributes use a menu operation See page 170 5 Still holding down the SNAPSHOT button from step 4 press the memory recall button corresponding to the register in which you want to save If you press a button which is lit orange or yellow the existing register contents are overwritten The button you pressed lights yellow and this completes the save operation The STORE STATS button lights amber and the numeric display shows the selected register number after the bank number To cancel a snapshot save operation After saving a snapshot to cancel the save hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button The STORE STATS button changes color from amber to green On a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to cancel a snapshot save operation Recalling a snapshot from a Flexi Pad control block As an example to recall a snapshot on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 167 sjoysdeus p 8 sjoysdeus p s deu 1 In the M E 1 bank Flexi Pad control block press the SNAPSHOT button This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to snapshot operations The numeric display shows the last selected bank number and the register number last recalled on the bank 2 Select the
289. switch the control panel to macro editing mode the macro being executed stops e During macro editing it is not possible to execute a macro e If you start execution of a macro by operating the Flexi Pad control block for an M E or PGM PST bank the numeric keypad control block or a button for which a macro attachment is set then before the end of execution of that macro you cannot recall and execute a separate macro from the Flexi Pad control block for a different bank Creating and Saving a Macro Use the following procedure 1 2 In the Flexi Pad control block press the MCRO button turning it on This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operations Select the bank of the register in which you want to save the macro For details of the method of operation see step 2 in the previous item Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro Hold down the MCRO button in the Flexi Pad control block and press the button in the memory recall section showing the desired register name This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro editing and the auto insert function is enabled The MCRO button lights red As an example when register 12 is specified the buttons in the memory recall section appear as in the following figure Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block Example f 9 T 7 8 9 Press to set a pause length i 4 6
290. t Enable or Disable To set the key preview configuration You can make this setting at any time regardless of the operation mode 1 In the Switcher gt Config menu press K PVW Config The K PVW Config menu appears The status area shows the key preview configuration for each bank 2 Using either of the following methods select the key preview to which the settings apply e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area to make the selection e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor The selected key preview appears in reverse video 3 In the lt Mode gt group select Video mode or Key mode If you select Key mode skip to step 6 4 In the lt Bkgd gt group select the background In standard mode or Multi Program mode select Clean or Utility2 then skip to step 6 In DSK mode select any of Bkgd1 to Bkgd4 5 In DSK mode turn the knobs to select the background signal Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2105 Bkgdito4 Background signal selection 1 to 18 a 1 to 6 M E1 OUTI to 6 7 to 12 M E2 OUTI to 6 13 to 18 M E3 OUTI to 6 6 In the lt Key 1 gt to lt Key 4 gt groups select the corresponding key status from the following Link Follow the on off link setting On Key is always on Off Key is always off Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 237 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 sajdeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3210640 Setting
291. t Linked Bus link destination bus T Referring to step 5 select the bus to be the link destination and press Bus Set 8 Turn the knob to select the link table and press Link Table Set Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Link Table No Link table selection 1108 For more information about link tables see the follovving The status area reflects the current setting status To delete a link Select the link you want to delete then press Clear in the Internal Bus Link menu Making link table settings Use the follovving procedure 250 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 1 In the Internal Bus Link menu press Link Table Select The Link Table Select menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the link source and link destination signals e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 4 Main No Video key signal for link source 2 1 to 128 5 No Video key signal for link destination 3 1 to 128 a When the selected bus has a key source bus set a key signal is displayed when other buses are selected a video signal is displayed 3 To confirm the selection press Link Src Set This links the link destination signal to the signal selected as Main No To initialize the set sour
292. t Rotate image on y Rotate image on x Rotate image on z ROT axis Spin mode axis Spin mode axis Spin mode AXIS LOC Source Move x axis of Move y axis of Move z axis of rotation rotation rotation LOC SIZE Source target Move image on x Move image on y Magnify and shrink axis axis image ASP PERS Source Change aspect ratio Change aspect ratio Change aspect ratio on x axis on y axis on x and y axes simultaneously Target Shift view point on x Shift view point on y Change distance axis axis from view point to image SHIFT ASP Source Change skew on x Change skew on y Change aspect ratio PERS axis axis on x and y axes simultaneously Three Dimensional Transformation Operations Three Dimensional Parameter Display You can check the values of the three dimensional parameters in the DME menu Displaying the three dimensional parameters in the DME menu In the menu control block select the top menu selection button DME The DME menu appears The status area shovvs the three dimensional parameters currently controlled by the device control block e When multiple DME channels are selected this shows the parameters for the reference channel e When both Global and Local are selected the three dimensional parameters are shown for the channel the reference channel for which the button is lit green Type of three dimensional space a Operation mode for three dimensional transform
293. t to delete For details of the method of operation see step 2 page 317 of Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 3 Hold down the STORE STATS button and then press the button in the memory recall section showing the corresponding register number The button you pressed in the memory recall section goes off and this deletes the macro The STORE STATS button lights amber Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 321 90 81 49 d5E02 soley 81 131deyo Macro Attachment Assigning The term macro attachment refers to the assignment of a macro register to a control panel button so that the macro execution is linked to the normal function of the button For an overview of macro attachment see Macros in Chapter I Volume 1 Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment Setting a macro attachment Use the following procedure The buttons for which a macro attachment can be set are the background A and background B rows of buttons only in the cross point control block of the M E banks and PGM PST bank 1 Recall the macro register you want to assign to the button For details of recall from the numeric keypad control block see page 311 For details of recall from the Flexi Pad control block see page 317 2 To set in pre macro mode hold down the PRE MCRO button in the cross point control block and to set in post macro mode hold down the POST MCRO button a
294. t you pressed first lights in green vvhile buttons pressed subsequently light in amber 2 VVith the function assignment buttons select the three dimensional coordinate space in which to perform the transformation LOCAL button Selects local coordinate space GLB button Selects global coordinate space You can select this button and the LOCAL button simultaneously SRC button Selects the source coordinate space TRGT button Selects the target coordinate space SRC and TRGT cannot be selected at the same time 3 Press the button for the operation you want to do turning it on to select the transformation mode The trackball and Z ring are assigned to the selected three dimensional coordinate space transformation mode For details of the three dimensional transformation operation modes see Transformation Operation Modes in Chapter I Volume 1 To move the image Press the LOC XYZ button turning it on You can move the image on the x and y axes with the trackball and move it on the z axis with the Z ring Pressing the LOC SIZE button instead of the LOC XYZ button turning it on makes it possible to move the image on the x and y axes To rotate the image Press the ROT button turning it on You can rotate the image on the x and y axes with the trackball and rotate it on the z axis with the Z ring To rotate the image in Spin mode press the ROT button turning it on while holding down the SHIFT but
295. tch Operations You can batch process all files or registers Carry out these operations using the File gt All External File gt All menu Displaying the Batch Operation Menu Use the following procedure 1 Press the top menu selection button FILE 2 Select VF6 All External File and HF1 All The All menu appears Batch Saving Files To save the data of all registers to hard disk or memory card use the follovving procedure e Files saved on the hard disk may be lost if the hard disk fails Alvvays keep separate backup copies of important files on a memory card e Format a memory card see page 203 before using it for the first time 1 In the device selection area of the All menu select the destination for saving the files HDD or Memory Card and directory See page 296 2 If there are registers you do not want to save in the lt Category gt group exclude them from the operation For details of the data to which operations apply see Files in Chapter 1 Volume 1 3 Press the Save button A confirmation message appears e Select Yes to carry out the batch save e Select No to cancel the batch save File Batch Operations Batch Recalling Files To recall files from hard disk or memory card use the follovving procedure 1 2 In the device selection area of the All menu select where the files are held IHDD or Memory Card and directory See page 296
296. ter is empty for the regions selected in step 3 E The selected register is empty for all currently selectable regions The entered register number appears in the display To apply attributes press the following buttons turning them on Attribute to apply Button Effect dissolve EFF DISS button Auto transition CLR AUTO TRANS button For details of attributes see Snapshots in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block In the numeric keypad control block it is not possible to apply the cross point hold and GPI output attributes For these see Applying snapshot attributes page 170 f Press the ENTER button This saves the snapshot and the STORE button goes off The RCALL and STORE STATS buttons light To cancel a snapshot save operation After saving a snapshot to cancel the save hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button Recalling a snapshot from the numeric keypad control block Use the following procedure 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This allocates the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations and the RCALL button lights 2 Press the region selection button corresponding to the region you want to recall turning it on Multiple selections are also possible M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P Select the M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 or PGM PST region r
297. ters with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Decay Degree to which the trail is left 1 0 00 to 100 00 2 Interval Freeze interval 1 to 255 frames 3 Live Proportion of the interval 0 00 to 100 00 between two successive freeze images for which the video is run a 0 00 is no trail At 100 00 the trail does not disappear 4 To erase the trail press Trail Eraser turning it on Switching the priority between the current image and trail superimposed In the lt Priority gt group select the method of superimposition Over Current image is on top Under Trail is on top Selecting the source to create a trail In the lt Trail Source gt group select the source to create a trail Freeze Video Use freeze images of the input video as source of the trail 68 DME Special Effect Operations Flat Color Use a flat color matte as source of the trail You can set the following parameters with the knobs Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Hue Rotate Use a color matte whose hue varies slightly with each frame for the trail of the afterimages You can set the following parameters with the knobs Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 Hue Spe
298. tes a rectangular parallelepiped from 3 successive channels For an illustration see Global Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Applying the Brick effect Use the following procedure 1 In the Global Effect gt Ch1 Ch4 menu select HF2 Brick The Brick menu appears 2 Press Brick turning it on The Brick effect is enabled and a rectangular parallelepiped brick showing the images of three channels appears You can use the knobs to adjust parameters for the height of the brick and the overlap between the three images When the Brick effect is enabled the z axis position of the front image in the source coordinate frame is shifted by the amount of half the height Therefore the image is somewhat magnified 3 Set the parameters suones do IWA 11 1010640 Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Height Height of brick 0 00 to 8 00 3 0 00 to 32 00 2 2 Front Overlap Front overlap 100 00 to 100 00 3 Side H Overlap Side H overlap 100 00 to 100 00 4 Side V Overlap Side V overlap 100 00 to 100 00 a Setting for SD 4 3 SD 16 9 b Setting for HD 4 3 HD 16 9 Global Effect Operations suones do JWA 0840 4 Specify the vvay to insert the side images vvhen the height is changed by pressing one of the following buttons in the lt Side V gt group or the lt Side H gt group Crop Crop the parts that do not fit into the side without shrinking the pict
299. the State After Powering On Start Up Menu 199 Reset and Initialization Initialize 2222 201 Installation Install 202 System Maintenance Maintenance 5222 203 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 205 Overall Control Panel Settings Config 5222 205 Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign 2222 212 AUX Delegation Buttons Settings Aux Assign Menu 216 Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu 5 218 Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu 222 Operation Settings Operation 2 2 2222 228 Screen Saver and Other Settings Maintenance Menul 232 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 235 Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu 235 Signal Input Settings Input 5522 239 Signal Output Settings Output Menu 2222 240 Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu 244 Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM MeN aa n EA e Bae Riven ain 246 Settings Relating to Function Links Link eee 249 Interfacing With External Device
300. the following procedure 1 In the device control block press the X Y or Z button turning it on The numeric keypad control block enters a mode in which you can enter parameters for the selected axis Three Dimensional Transformation Operations 2 Enter a parameter value vvith the numeric keypad The number of significant digits after a decimal point is 4 3 Press the ENTER button The parameter value is changed and the image changes To enter difference values You can enter difference values by pressing the button entering the difference from the current value and pressing the TRIM button to confirm The button toggles between plus and minus each time it is pressed Resetting three dimensional parameter values Pressing the CTR button in the device control block sets the current three dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points To reset three dimensional parameter values to the defaults for the current transformation operation mode press the CTR button twice in rapid succession For details of detents and default values see Three Dimensional Transformations in Chapter I Volume 1 Clearing the working buffer The working buffer is memory that holds the instantaneous state of an effect To clear initialize only the three dimensional transform parameters in the working buffer press the CLR WORK BUFR button in the device control block To c
301. the numeric keypad control block refer to the operations in Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block page 145 Note however that in place of the EFF button in the numeric keypad control block the SNAPSHOT button is used Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 163 sjoysdeus p saydeyo sjoysdeus p Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block In the Flexi Pad control block on each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks you can only carry out operations on snapshots for that bank It is therefore not necessary to select a region UNDO button SNAPSHOT button Numeric display STORE STATS button Numeric display XPT HOLD ABUW1234 Bank selection buttons Memory recall section Memory recall section UNDO button SNAPSHOT button Flexi Pad control block standard type Flexi Pad control block simple type 1 64 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block Banks and Registers m a standard type Flexi Pad control block in order to handle the 99 registers they are considered in groups These groups are called banks and there are ten banks numbered from 0 to 9 The correspondence betvveen banks and registers is shovvn in the follovving table Bank number Register numbers
302. the stop point and variable speed are both set the variable speed setting takes priority Stop Output a Stop command Before executing the Stop command if the timecode for the set stop point has been reached or on a disk recorder if the end of the file has been reached then at that point the device stops To set a start point in the lt Start TC gt group press the Set button A timecode window appears If you do not want to set the start point skip to step 8 For a disk recorder on which the start point is not set the file recalled in the disk recorder when the keyframe point is passed is the subject of the action Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 103 S 1A Q Jeusa xy Z 108 S OIA Q eux Z4 10640 104 6 Set the start point as a timecode value 7 Press Enter The new start point setting is reflected in the status area 8 To set the stop point in the lt Stop TC gt group press the Set button A timecode window appears 9 Set the stop point as a timecode value If you do not want to set the stop point skip to step 11 1 O Press Enter The new stop point setting is reflected in the status area 1 1 To set the variable speed in the lt Variable Speed gt group carry out any of the following e Press Fit Without setting a speed value this automatically carries out playback according to automatically calculated values for the duration and keyframe duration to fit
303. tings 74 J Joystick sensitivity 232 K Kaleidoscope settings 55 Key density settings 75 Frame menu 349 memory mode 248 priority operation mode 248 settings 246 snapshot attributes 173 source selection 75 key delegation assign 206 Keyframe 120 copying 127 creation 120 delay setting 135 deletion 125 duration setting 133 insertion 121 loop 128 modification 121 moving 126 operations 111 path setting 136 pause 128 register operations 150 strobe settings 71 L Lens settings 56 Lighting settings 64 M E 1 to M E 3 menus 342 Macro attachment removal 324 attachment setting 322 creation editing 312 creation saving 318 execution 311 317 execution by attachment 325 menu 352 register recalling 311 317 saving 314 Macro operations in Flexi Pad control block 316 in numeric keypad control block 310 Mask processing order 248 Master snapshot creation sav ing 174 Master timeline creation sav ing 145 with the menu 147 with the numeric keypad control block 145 Melt settings 62 Memory card formatting 203 Menu shortcut assignment memory recall button 221 user preference buttons 219 Menu tree 342 Merging 153 Mirror settings 53 MISC menu 346 Mixing images 79 MKS 8080 8082 290 setting status 290 simple connection 290 Mono settings 33 Mosaic glass settings 43 settings 35 wipes 333 Motion decay settings 70 Moving 152 Multi cross point assign tables 214 mirror settings 54 move settings
304. tion Install Menu To install software or firmware in a device use the System gt Install menu To display the Install menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF1 System and HF6 Install The status area shows the version of the software installed in each device Installing software Use the following procedure 1 2 Insert the memory card holding the software into the memory card slot Press the Install button The System gt lInstall gt Install menu appears showing a list of the software contained in the memory card Using any of the following methods select the device All When this is on all devices are selected for the operation Plural When this is on you can specify a number of devices to which the operation will apply In this case in the status area press the desired devices turning them to reverse video To cancel a selection press once more to return to normal display When both of the above buttons are off You can specify any device in the status area To carry out installation press Execute A confirmation message appears Select Yes This installs the software Setup for the Whole System Displaying installation details m the System gt Install menu press Detail Information This accesses the Detail Information menu and displays the detailed information on the software and firmware installed in the currently selected device System Maintenance Maintenance Me
305. tion 1to 9 5 Reg No Register number 1 to 45 1 to 99 1 to 399 9 a Action list when the trigger type is other than Level Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 223 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes 91 sa deyD 224 VVhen Target is M E 1 M E 2 or M E 3 Cut Auto Trans Keyl Cut Key2 Cut Key3 Cut Key4 Cut Keyl Auto Trans Key2 Auto Trans Key3 Auto Trans Key4 Auto Trans Key SS Recall Key2 SS Recall Key3 SS Recall Key4 SS Recall VVhen Target is P P Cut Auto Trans DSKI Cut DSK2 Cut DSK3 Cut DSK4 Cut DSK1 Auto Trans DSK2 Auto Trans DSK3 Auto Trans DSK4 Auto Trans DSKI SS Recall DSK2 SS Recall DSK3 SS Recall DSK4 SS Recall FTB Cut FTB Auto Trans When Target is Common Setup SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind FM1 Frame Freeze FM1 Field Freeze FM1 Freeze Off FM2 Frame Freeze FM2 Field Freeze FM2 Freeze Off No Action e Action list when the trigger type is Level When Target is M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 or P P No Action When Target is Common Setup Format Overall system settings frame field rate number of lines Aspect overall system settings Simul No Action b When knob 2 selection is Key Snapshot c When knob 2 selection is Snapshot d When knob 2 selection is Effect 6 Press Action Set to confirm the action selection The selected setting appears i
306. to as a virtual image Using the DME menu you can make a setting not to show the virtual images Canceling virtual images Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears 2 Press the Wrap Around button turning it on The virtual image disappears Wrap Around on Virtual image Three Dimensional Transformation Operations DME Special Effect Operations You can use DME to add a variety of special effects The following types of DME special effects are available For details of DME special effects see DME Special Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Edge effects Border Crop Beveled Edge Effects for entire image Defocus Blur Multi Move Effects for video image Sepia Mono Posterization Solarization Nega Contrast Mosaic Freeze effects Nonlinear effects Wave Mosaic Glass Flag Twist Ripple Rings Broken Glass Flying Bar Blind Split Split Slide Mirror Multi Mirror Kaleidoscope Lens Circle Panorama Page Turn Roll Cylinder Sphere Explosion Swirl Melt Character Trail Lighting effects Recursive effects Trail Motion Decay Keyframe Strobe Background color Separate Sides effects for front and back sides Signal inversion Invert effect Key density adjustment Key source selection Operations common to all DME special effects In this section explan
307. to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Bank Bank selection 1104 2 Button Control block button selection 1 to 24 3 In the lt Action gt group select the function you want to assign Menu Shortcut Assign a frequently used menu to be recalled menu shortcut Utility Command Assign a function enable disable or similar operation utility command Shotbox Recall Assign a shotbox register recall 4 Depending on the selection in step 3 make the following settings When Menu Shortcut is selected For the subsequent operations see the next item Assigning a menu shortcut to a memory recall button in the utility shotbox control block page 221 When Utility Command is selected A list of commands appears on the right of the status area using any of the following methods select the command you want to assign e Press directly on the list e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor 220 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Command Utility command selection Tis When Shotbox Recall is selected Turn the knob to select the shotbox register you want to assign Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Shotbox Shotbox register selection 1 to 99 Press Action Set This assigns the selected action which
308. ton You can operate in the same way with the trackball and Z ring To move an axis of rotation With the SRC button selected in step 2 press the AXIS LOC button turning it on You can move the axis of rotation of the image on the x and y axes of the image with the trackball and on the z axis with the Z ring To magnify or shrink the image Press the LOC SIZE button turning it on 14 Three Dimensional Transformation Operations You can magnify and shrink the image vvith the Z ring Rotate counterclockvvise to shrink and clockvvise to magnify To change the aspect ratio of the image With the SRC button selected in step 2 press the ASP PERS button turning it on You can change the aspect ratio independently on the x and y axes with the trackball and change it simultaneously on both the x and y axes with the Z ring To change the perspective on the image With the TRGT button selected in step 2 press the ASP PERS button turning it on You can change the perspective of the image on the x and y axes with the trackball and change the distance to the view point with the Z ring To change the skew of the image With the SRC button selected in step 2 press the ASP PERS button turning it on while holding down the SHIFT button You can change the skew of the image along the x and y axes with the trackball Depending on the axis of the change operate the trackball and Z ring as follows e To change on
309. ton turning it on The display in the numeric keypad control block shows KF DUR followed by the duration of the current keyframe seconds frames Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block enter the timecode value for the keyframe duration as a maximum of four digits For example to set 9 seconds and 20 frames enter 920 You can also use the TRIM button to enter a difference value See To enter a difference value page 119 Press the ENTER button to confirm the entry This changes the keyframe duration to the new setting In addition to the above operation the keyframe duration may also be automatically changed as a result of changing the effect duration See the next section Setting the Effect Duration To set the effect duration use the following procedure 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Press the EFF DUR button turning it on Time Settings The display in the numeric keypad control block shows DUR followed by the effect duration minutes seconds frames 3 Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block enter the timecode value for the effect duration as a maximum of six digits For example to set 3 minutes 7 seconds and 15 frames enter 30715 You can also use the TRIM button to enter a difference value See To enter a difference value page 119 Press the ENTER button This changes the effect duration to th
310. ton and the bus to be assigned e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Deleg No Selection of AUX delegation 1 to 1283 button 2 Bus No Selection of bus to be assigned 1 to 121 P a The setting can be from to 62 The valid settings however depend on the number of buttons and the delegation button shift mode Number of buttons Shift mode Valid settings 16 OFF 1 to 16 ON 1 to 30 24 OFF 1 to 24 ON 1 to 46 32 OFF 1 to 32 ON 1 to 62 b The buses that can be assigned are as follows Aux to Aux48 Monitor to Monitor8 DME1V to DME4V and DMEIK to DME4K M E1 Utility and 2 M E2 Utility and 2 M E3 Utility and 2 P P Utility 1 and 2 Frame Memory Sourcel and 2 Edit Preview DSK1 to 4 Fill Source M E3 Key 1 and 4 Fill Source M E 1 EXT DME M E 2 EXT DME M E 3 EXT DME P P EXT DME DME Utility 1002 For a button for which you want to disable operation press Inhibit 2 Press Set to confirm the selection Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 217 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo Setting the AUX delegation button shift operation To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the rovv of AUX delegation buttons select one of the following in the lt Shift Mode gt group of the Panel
311. trigger on a falling edge of an input pulse X_ Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal Setup Relating to Switcher Processor m Level Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or high No Operation Apply no trigger on an input pulse In the lt Target gt group select the action block M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P Set the action for one of the operating banks Common Setup Set an action for something other than the above or a setup action Using any of the following methods select the action to be set e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 3 Action Action selection 1to 2 4 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 1 to 99 a Action list when the trigger type is other than Level VVhen Target is M E 1 M E 2 or M E 3 Cut Auto Trans Keyl Cut Keyl Auto Trans Key2 Cut Key2 Auto Trans Key3 Cut Key3 Auto Trans Key4 Cut Key4 Auto Trans SS Recall 1 SS Recall Key2 SS Recall Key3 SS Recall Key4 SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind KF Reverse Run No Action When Target is P P Cut Auto Trans DSK1 Cut DSK1 Auto Trans DSK2 Cut DSK2 Auto Trans DSK3 Cut DSK3 Auto Trans DSK4 Cut DSK4 Auto Trans FTB Cut FTB Auto T
312. trol block press the top menu selection button DEV Control of External Devices Control of P BUS Devices Creating and Editing the P BUS Timeline This section describes hovv to set an action for a keyframe point and edit the P BUS timeline For details of keyframe creation and editing operations see Creating and Editing Keyframes page 120 Using the P BUS timeline function requires the P BUS control mode to be set to Timeline Carry out this setting in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface menu Setting an action To set an action use the following procedure 1 In the Device menu press VF2 P Bus Timeline The Device gt P Bus Timeline menu appears The status area shows two lists The left list is for setting combinations of devices and actions The settings in this list will be saved as keyframe point data The right list is for selecting the action Select the P BUS device for which you want to set an action by using any of the following methods to specify the device ID e Press directly on the left list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 ID Device number 0 to 23 Using either of the following methods select the action e Press directly on the right list in the status area e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob
313. trol block shows the current keyframe number followed by TO Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block carry out the following operations To set the first keyframe in the range to be modified press the CLR button then enter the keyframe number and press the ENTER button to confirm To set the last keyframe in the range to be modified enter the keyframe number from the numeric keypad and press the ENTER button to confirm Press the MOD button Alternatively hold down the SHIFT button and press the MOD button For the difference in the result see Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified page 124 Creating and Editing Keyframes 123 spay Jaydeyo S12 H7 g 1010640 124 This makes the modification simultaneously to all keyframes in the specified keyframe range Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified When you select a number of keyframes to modify and press the MOD button alone or in combination with the SHIFT button the result of the operation differs as shown below Modifying the keyframes by pressing the MOD button alone The modified parameter values are taken as absolute values and applied to all of the selected keyframes Background A Background B Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution
314. ttings 51 Blur settings 30 Border processing order 248 settings 23 Brick settings 81 Brightness adjustment 233 Broken glass settings 50 Button assignment settings 218 operation mode 230 C Calibration 233 Character Trail settings 64 Circle settings 57 Color Bkgd menu 345 Combiner settings 78 Contrast settings 34 Control panel settings 205 Copy Swap menu 346 Copying 152 Crop settings 25 Cross point button shift operation 215 settings 212 Cueup amp Play 96 automatic execution 98 settings in a menu 99 Cylinder settings 59 D Date and time 203 DCU serial port settings 226 setup 265 Default wipe edge softness 249 Defocus settings 29 Delay setting 135 Destination names 229 Device interface 222 253 261 menu 348 Direct store 89 Directory operations 306 creating a directory 306 deleting a directory 307 renaming a directory 306 write protecting a directo ry 307 Disk recorder control 94 Cueup amp Play 96 file operations 106 information check 95 timeline 101 timeline editing 102 DME 11 menu 347 setup 260 special effects 23 DME wipe pattern list for one channel mode 336 for two channel mode 340 Door 337 Double click sensitivity 232 DSK auto drop function 247 Duration mode setting 132 E Edit points 118 setting 118 Effect attribute settings 150 duration setting 134 execution 140 execution direction 141 menu 350 repeating 142 saving 143 settings 228 status display 151 Effect register copy
315. tus is selected there is no Pulse Width or Timing setting In the lt Source Device gt group select the control panel or DCU to handle the GPI output SCU1 IDI control panel PNL1 SCU2 ID2 control panel PNL2 SCU3 ID3 control panel PNL3 DCU1 1D1 DCU DCU2 ID2 DCU When the action set in the following step 5 is carried out on the control panel selected here this causes a GPI output It is also possible to output error information When the DCU is selected you can output error information by means of the action set in step 5 Setup Relating to DCU 271 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 5 Using Pres e Pres any of the following methods select the action you want to set s directly on the list appearing in the status area s the arrovv keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Action Action selection 1to 2 5 Reg No Snapshot register number 1 to 4 a Action list when the trigger type is other than Status When Source Device is SCU 1 1 SS Recall M E1 Key2 SS Recall M E1 Key3 SS Recall M El Key4 SS Recall M E2 1 SS Recall M E2 Key2 SS Recall M E2 Key3 SS Recall M E2 Key4 SS Recall M H3 1 SS Recall M E3 Key2 SS Recall M E3 Key3 SS Recall M E3 Key4 SS Recall P P DSKI SS Recall P P DSK2 SS Recall P P DSK3 SS
316. u appears 2 Press Poster Solar turning it on The Posterization and Solarization effects are enabled You can adjust the coarseness of the gradations with the knobs DME Special Effect Operations 33 Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 suones do WA 11 1010840 suones do AWG 0840 3 Set the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Poster Adjustment Coarseness of luminance gradations Posterization parameter Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Solar Coarseness of chroma gradations Solarization parameter 0 00 to 100 00 Nega Settings This effect reverses the luminance or chroma of the image For an illustrative figure and other information see DME Special Effects in Chapter I Volume 1 Applying the Nega effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify menu appears 2 Press Nega Y or Nega C turning it on or press both buttons turning them on Nega Y Reverse the luminance Nega C Reverse the chroma Contrast Settings This effect changes the contrast of the luminance and chroma of the image Applying the Contrast effect Use the following procedure 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify
317. ues to stretch the tiles in the horizontal direction Freeze Settings This effect freezes the input video The following types are available e Hard Freeze e Time Strobe e Film For details of the operation modes see DME Special Effects in Chapter 1 Volume 1 To apply a Freeze effect start by displaying the Freeze menu In the DME menu select VF3 Freeze and HF1 Freeze Applying the Hard Freeze effect Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Freeze Timing gt group select the signal freeze timing Frame Freeze one frame of signal Field 1 Freeze the first field of signal 2 In the lt Freeze gt group press Hard Freeze turning it on The Hard Freeze is executed displaying a still image Applying the Time Strobe effect Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Freeze Timing gt group select the signal freeze timing Frame Freeze one frame of signal 36 DME Special Effect Operations Field 1 Freeze the first field of signal 2 In the lt Freeze gt group press Time Strobe turning it on The Time Strobe freeze is enabled You can adjust the freeze interval and the ratio of live video inserted between freeze images 3 Set the parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Duration Freeze interval 1 to 255 frames 2 Live Ratio of live video inserted 0 00 to 100 00 between freeze images Applying the Film effect Use the f
318. urce Source start address 1 to 10173 1 to 1009 1 to 993 0 Destination 1 Destination start address 1 to 1024 Level Level 1108 a VVhen Matrix Size is 8 1 b VVhen Matrix Size is 16x1 c VVhen Matrix Size is 32x1 To couple external boxes By coupling a number of external boxes the number of inputs can be increased Here the example of coupling External Box and External Box2 is described Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally 279 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 9 30140640 280 1 In the External Box Assign menu select External box1 from the lt Device gt group N In the lt Matrix Size gt group select 8x1 3 Turn the knobs to make adjustments Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Source Source start address 1 to 1017 2 Destination 1 Destination start address 1 to 1024 3 Level Level 1108 4 In the lt Device gt group select External 21 In the lt Matrix Size gt group select 32x1 6 Turn the knobs to make adjustments At this point make the settings of Destination and Level the same as in step 3 This automatically couples External Box and External Box2 forming an external box with 40 8 32 inputs Tally Group Settings Group Tally Menu With the S Bus protocol tally control is possible for groups 1 to 8 but in this system you can use either groups to 4 or groups 5 to 8 You c
319. ure You can set the following parameters Parameter limits vary as shown below depending on the aspect ratio 4 3 or 16 9 selected in the system 4 3 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 H Position of left crop 4 00 to 4 00 2 V Position of top crop 3 00 to 3 00 3 Rotation Angle of rotation when rotated 1 0 90 180 270 around the Z axis of the source space 16 9 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 H Position of left crop 4 00 to 4 00 2 V Position of top crop 2 25 to 2 25 3 Rotation Angle of rotation when rotated 1 0 90 180 270 around the Z axis of the source space The set position becomes the upper left corner of Side V or Side H The right and bottom sides of the inserted image are set automatically Compress Images are inserted after being compressed You can set the following parameters Parameter limits vary as shown below depending on the aspect ratio 4 3 or 16 9 selected in the system e 4 3 mode Knob 1 Parameter Adiustment Setting values 1 Top Position of top crop 3 00 to 3 00 2 Left Position of left crop 4 00 to 4 00 3 Right Position of right crop 4 00 to 4 00 4 Bottom Position of bottom crop 3 00 to 3 00 5 Rotation Angle of rotation when rotated 0 90 180 270 around the Z axis of the source space 82 Global Effect Operations e 16 9 mode
320. ure in picture transition mode For details of creating an effect for user programmable DME see Creating User Programmable DME Patterns in Chapter 6 Volume 1 Which DME channel is selected as the reference region lit green in the numeric keypad control block is reflected in the lt Transition Mode gt group display Creating and Editing Keyframes Time Settings You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the keyframe durations or the effect duration For details of keyframe duration and effect duration see Time Settings in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Setting the Keyframe Duration KF DUR button EDIT ENBL button EFF DUR button STOP EFF NEXT KF const auto R T DUR iz TC COPY PASTE I LL PREV KF SHIFT INS DELAY button Keyframe control block Time Settings 133 spay 8 S12 H73 g 4210640 Setting the keyframe duration You can set the value of the keyframe duration independently for each keyframe by the following method 1 2 3 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on Stop the effect on the keyframe for which you want to set the duration The time from this keyframe to the following keyframe is what you set Press the KF DUR but
321. urn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Parallel Output Slot Output port slot 2to6 2 Parallel Output Port Output port 1 to 54 5 GPI Output GPI output 1 to 50 Setup Relating to DCU 269 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 32140640 270 4 To confirm the selected setting press GPI Output Set This confirms the selection which is reflected in the status area Releasing the assignment of a GPI output port Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt Output Config menu select what the setting applies to DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group 2 In the lt Parallel Output Assign gt group if GPI Output is on press it to turn it off 3 Turn the knobs to select the slot and port to which the setting applies Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 From Slot First port slot 2to6 2 From Port First port number 1 to 54 3 To Slot Last port slot 2to6 4 To Port Last port number 1 to 54 4 In the lt Parallel Output Assign gt group press No Assign GPI Output Setting GPI Output Assign Menu To set the trigger type and so on for each GPI output display the DCU gt GPI Output Assign menu To display the GPI Output Assign menu In Engineering Setup select VF5 DCU and HF4 GPI Output Assign The GPI output port setting status appears in the status area Making DCU GPI out
322. ursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 No Signal format screen aspect ratio 1 to selection To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is high press H Set To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low press L Set This confirms the setting which appears in the status area When the action is Format these settings conflict with the current settings but after making the settings agreement is restored after a pulse change or povver off on Making switcher processor GPI output settings Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Device Interface menu press GPI Output The GPI Output menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter 1 Adjustment Setting values 1 Port Port selection 1108 Setup Relating to Svvitcher Processor 3 In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger polarity The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open circuit or drives the output high and holds this state for the specified pulse vvidth The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted or drives the output low and holds this state for the specified pulse width Each time the trigger occur
323. us Display 172 Setting Key Snapshot Attributes 173 Creating and Saving a Master 8 5 2 2222 174 Snapshot Register 040 0 175 Chapter 15 Utility Shotbox Utility 178 Executing a Utility VVith the User Preference Buttons Menu Control Block az cities hati bint Arlee Actin meee 178 Executing a Utility in the Utility Shotbox Control Block 179 Shotbox Register 181 Creating a Shotbox Register in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 181 Creating a Shotbox Register Using the ee eee eee 183 Shotbox Execution sssusa i 186 Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 186 Shotbox Execution in the Flexi Pad Control Block 187 Table of Contents 5 Shotbox Execution in the Utility Shotbox Control Block 189 Shotbox Register Editing 22 191 Chapter 16 Engineering Setup Setup for the Whole 195 Network Settings Network Config 2222 2222 195 System Settings System Config Menu 2222 196 Setting the Signal Format and Screen Aspect Ratio Format Menu 198 Selecting
324. user regions If you change the user region settings the previously stored snapshot data and keyframe effect data can no longer be used Use the follovving procedure 1 m the Switcher gt Config menu press User1 8 Config The User1 8 Config menu appears The status area shovvs the region names and assigned user region numbers Using any of the following methods select the region you want to set e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Region Region selection 1 7 m the lt User Region Assign gt group select the user region you want to assign If you do not want to assign a user region select No Assign Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make the settings for other regions To confirm the setting press Execute To cancel the setting and return to the original state press Clear without pressing Execute When you press Execute a confirmation message appears Press Yes This assigns a region to a user region Assigning PGM PST logically to an M E Use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher gt Config menu press Logical M E Assign The Logical M E Assign menu appears The status area shows the physical M E and logical M E organization Setup Relating to Switcher Processor 2 Select the M E you vvant to logically set t
325. ustment Setting values 1 Item Item selection 1 to 16 Press Set A numeric keypad window for hexadecimal input appears Setup Relating to DCU 275 dm s Suu ul5uz 91 saydeyo dnjes Suu ulBuz 91 3010640 276 T Set the VTR constants using values in the range 00 to ff Block Byte Setting item BLOCK 1 1 HI BYTE DEVICE TYPE LO BYTE DEVICE TYPE HI BYTE FRAME PREROLL TIME LO BYTE FRAME PREROLL TIME EDIT DELAY FRAME EE DELAY FRAME OVER RUN FRAME TRAJECTORY BLOCK 2 TC READ DELAY FRAME START DELAY FRAME AFTER SYNC DELAY AFTER SYNC DELAY MODE1 MODE2 MAX PRRL SPEED o NI ol ol AJIN ool l ol ol AJOJN QUICK PVW PRRL TIME FRAME 8 Press Enter This confirms the settings 9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 as required to set the constants for other VTRs To make detailed settings for a disk recorder Sony disk 9 pin protocol Use the following procedure 1 In the DCU gt Serial Port Assign menu select the target for the setting DCU1 or DCU2 from the lt DCU Select gt group 2 Using any of the following methods specify the serial port connected to the disk recorder for which you want to make the settings e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjust
326. witch automatically between fields and frames Field Do interpolation in field units This gives natural movement suitable for moving video Frame Do interpolation in frame units This gives higher image precision suitable for still pictures 3 When you select Adaptive Y C or Adaptive Y in step 2 set the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mode Degree of motion detection 1104 76 DME Special Effect Operations 4 In the Key Field Frame Mode gt group select the interpolation method for the key signal Adaptive Detect changes in the luminance component of the key signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames Field Do interpolation in field units This gives natural movement suitable for moving video Frame Do interpolation in frame units This gives higher image precision suitable for still pictures 5 When you select Adaptive in step 4 set the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mode Degree of motion detection 1 to 4 6 In the lt Filter Mode gt group select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded Model1 Even when the picture is reduced add compensation so that it can be seen clearly Mode2 Suppress aliasing when expanding or reducing the picture The number of pixels to use in interpolation is selectable in the lt Interpolation Mode gt group but when using the
327. xi Pad Control Block 319 90 81 86 soley 81 4108 incorporated into the macro being edited Hovvever the macro assigned to the button is not executed e While carrying out macro editing in the Flexi Pad control block absolutely no macro operations are possible in the Flexi Pad control blocks for other M E and PGM PST banks Macro operations from the numeric keypad control block are also not possible To cancel the saving of a macro To cancel the saving of a macro immediately after performing it hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button Inserting a pause event Use the following procedure 1 Press the PAUS button in the memory recall section The buttons in the memory recall section change as follows 2 Enter the length of pause you want to set 1 to 999 frames 3 Press the PAUS ENTR button This sets the pause length and inserts the pause event The memory recall section display returns to its former state Deleting a macro Use the following procedure 1 In the Flexi Pad control block press the MCRO button This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operations The numeric display shows the previously selected bank number and the number of the last recalled register 320 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 2 Select the bank of the register holding the macro you vvan
328. y UN Changing the position of background B in the horizontal direction Modify keyframe 2 Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify simultaneously Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Result The horizontal position of background B in keyframes 1 and 3 is now the same as that in keyframe 2 In all keyframes the vertical position remains unchaged as the parameter is not changed Creating and Editing Keyframes Modifying the keyframes by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the MOD button The modified parameter values are taken as relative values which modify all of the selected keyframes Background A Background B Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution 4 n Changing the position of background B in the horizontal direction Modify keyframe 2 Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify simultaneously Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Result Background B of keyframes 1 and 3 is moved in the horizontal direction by the same amount as in keyframe 2 Deletion Deleting keyframes Use the following procedure in the keyframe control block Creating and Editing Keyframes 125 spay 8 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on Stop the effect at th
329. y 7113 File Edit 7113 1 VF2 Effect 4 Video Proc Memory 7114 File Edit 7114 1 VF3 Snapshot HF1 Effect 1 991 7121 File Edit 7121 1 VF4 Shotbox Macro 2 Effect 101 199 7122 File Edit 7122 1 VF5 Frame Memory HF3 Effect 201 299 7123 File Edit 7123 1 VF6 All External File HF1 Snapshot 7131 File Edit 7131 1 VF7 Configure HF2 VVipe Snapshot 7132 File Edit 7132 1 HF3 DME Snapshot 7133 File Edit 7133 1 HF4 Key Snapshot 7134 File Edit 7134 1 HF1 Shotbox 7141 File Edit 7141 1 HF2 Macro 7142 File Edit 7142 1 HF3 Macro Attachment 7143 File Edit 7143 1 HF1 Frame Memory 7151 File Edit 7151 1 HF 1 All 7161 HF2 Import Export 7162 HF1 Directory 7171 Menu Tree 353 x pu ddy x pu ddy 354 Engineering Setup Menu ENG SETUP button Engineering Setup VF1 System HF1 Network Config 7311 VF2 Panel HF2 System Config 7312 Panel Assign 7312 1 VF3 Switcher Assign 7312 2 VF4 DMF VF5 DCU HF3 Format 7313 Active Line Aspect 7313 1 Switcher Aspect 7313 2 VF6 Router Tally Eo Aspect 7313 3 to foll wing HF4 Start Up 7314 pages HF5 Initialize 7315 HF6 Install 7316 Detail Information 7316 1 HF7 Maintenance 7317 HF1 Config 7321 DSK Fader Assign 7321 1 Key Trans Link 7321 2 External
330. y of the following methods select the switcher cross point button and the matrix source to be linked to the button e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Main No Switcher cross point button 1 to 128 2 Source No Matrix source selection 1 to 128 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel 3 To confirm the matrix source selection made in step 2 press Link Source Set This confirms the selection which is reflected in the status area 4 As required repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the matrix sources to be linked to other cross point buttons To initialize the set links Press Init Link Table A confirmation message appears Press Yes The links set using the above procedure are initialized to the default settings and this is reflected in the status area To make link bus settings For the link number selected in the External Bus Link menu use the following procedure 1 In the Panel gt Config gt External Bus Link menu press Link Bus Adjust The Link gt Link Bus Adjust menu appears The status area lists the current link status and the switcher buses and routing switcher destinations that can be selected In this menu too you can use knob to select the link to be set 2 Using any of the following methods select the
331. y the Roll effect Display the Roll menu The knobs in the Roll menu have the same functions as those in the Page Turn menu For details about operation see Page Turn settings page 58 Cylinder settings The Cylinder effect winds the whole image onto a cylinder To apply the Cylinder effect With the Cylinder menu displayed set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Radius Degree to which image is wound onto 0 00 to 100 00 the cylinder Min R Radius of the cylinder 0 00 to 100 00 Offset Horizontal position of the image 100 00 to 100 00 wound onto cylinder DME Special Effect Operations 59 suones do AWG 11 1010640 suones do JWA 0840 60 The procedure for selecting the input signal in the lt Back Video gt group is the same as for the Page Turn menu For details about operation see Page Turn settings page 58 Sphere settings The Sphere effect winds the whole image onto a sphere To apply the Sphere effect Display the Sphere menu The knobs in the Sphere menu have the same functions as those in the Cylinder menu For details about operation see Cylinder settings page 59 Explosion settings The Explosion effect divides the image into fragments which expand as they fly out To apply the Explosion effect With the Explosion menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the lt Mode gt group select th
332. y using the numeric keypad control block See illustration below Additionally in each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks you can use the Flexi Pad control block to save and recall See page 164 To apply attributes or display the status use the Snapshot menu See page 170 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block Saving and Recalling Snapshots Snapshot operations with the numeric keypad control block use the following buttons UNDO button EFF DISS button SNAPSHOT button STORE STATS button Display CLR AUTO 00000 000000 TRANS button TRIM GPI ENBL button RCALL button Numeric keypad Region selection buttons STORE button Numeric keypad control block Saving a snapshot from the numeric keypad control block Use the following procedure 1 Make the settings for the state you want to save as a snapshot 2 In the numeric keypad control block press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This allocates the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations and the RCALL button lights 3 Press the region selection button corresponding to the region for which you want to save turning it on You can select more than one region M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P These select the corresponding M E 1 M E 2
333. yframe is executed e To execute an effect be sure to carry out a Rewind For example when the start command only is set for a keyframe playback starts from the current position in the same way as with a VTR no automatic cue up Control of VTRs and Disk Recorders 101 S IA Q Jeusa xy Z 108 S OIA Q jeusalxy Z4 10642 102 e During file playback to play the next keyframe at variable speed for the next keyframe set variable speed only and do not set the start point see figure below Playback Playback at set variable soeed gt A A A KF1 KF2 a KF3 a In keyframe 2 set variable speed only and do not set the start point When using a disk recorder with the VTR disk recorder timeline if you carry out the following sequence of operations the system may freeze on the frame of the start point 1 Press the RUN button to play to a point close to the end of a file 2 Stop playback 3 Press the RUN button once more In such cases first recall a different register then carry out the following sequence 1 Recall the original register again 2 Press the REWIND button 3 Press the RUN button VTR disk recorder timeline editing This section describes how to set an action at a keyframe point and how to edit the VTR disk recorder timeline For details of the operations for keyframe creation and editing see Creating and Editing Keyfra

Sony Water Dispenser 2 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents